home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search
Text File | 1991-03-22 | 364.7 KB | 8,933 lines |
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 1
-
-
- LAN-LINK Copyright (c) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991 by G3ZCZ
- All Rights Reserved
-
- Joe Kasser G3ZCZ
- POB 3419
- Silver Spring
- Md., 20918, U.S.A.
- Voice (301) 593 6136
- Data BBS (301) 593 9067
- Compuserve (CIS) 70531,1405
- _______
- ____|__ | (tm)
- --| | |-------------------
- | ____|__ | Association of
- | | |_| Shareware
- |__| o | Professionals
- -----| | |---------------------
- |___|___| MEMBER
-
- LAN-LINK is a Personal Packet Terminal Program for the TNC1,
- TNC2, KPC-2 and most of all a smart multimode digital communica-
- tions controller for the KAM, MFJ1278 and the PK-232.
-
- The program is distributed as a Shareware product. You may freely
- copy and share the product for noncommercial use, with your
- friends, associates and other radio amateurs. If you decide to
- use the product, you are asked to become a registered user by
- completing the registration form and sending it, and $35.00 or
- equivalent in foreign currency to the author. All checks should
- be drawn on US banks. Upon receipt of your registration, you will
- receive one free update disk, telephone and mail (electronic and
- regular) support. If you are not satisfied with the program
- after registering it, your money will be refunded no questions
- asked, for up to 30 days from the date your registration was
- acknowledged.
-
- European Radio Amateur users may register (24.00 Pounds Sterling,
- includes VAT) and obtain support from Terry Dansey at ReadyCrest
- Ltd., PO Box 75, Chatham, Kent, ME5 9DL, England. ReadyCrest
- Ltd. accepts credit cards (Access, Visa, MasterCard and
- Eurocard). Telephones: Voice 44 (0)634-687168, FAX 44 (0)634-
- 687178, Data (BBS) 44 (0)634-200931.
-
- LAN-LINK may not be sold or distributed with another product
- without the express written permission of Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ.
-
- Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ will only support unmodified copies of this
- software.
-
- Potential Commercial Users please contact Joe Kasser directly for
- modifications and/or details of Site licensing.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 2
-
-
- TABLE OF CONTENTS
-
- 1.0 INTRODUCTION
- 1.1 PROGRAM HIGHLIGHTS
- 1.1.1 Packet Radio
- 1.1.2 AMTOR
- 1.1.3 Morse/BAUDOT/ASCII
-
- 2.0 Getting Started
- 2.1 Bringing LAN-LINK Up the First Time
- 2.2 Using the Quick Menu
- 2.3 Connecting to Other Stations
- 2.4 Upgrading from YAPP
- 2.5 Using Different TNCs
- 2.6 Using Different HF and VHF Configuration Files
- 2.7 Using the AMTOR/PACKET Robot/Automatic Contest Station
-
- 3.0 Things You Should Know
- 3.1 Memory Requirements
- 3.2 PC to TNC Communications
- 3.3 Open Loop
- 3.4 Problems
- 3.5 The Contents of the Status Window
- 3.6 Logbooks
- 3.7 How To Get an Update
-
- 4.0 Function Keys
- 4.1 Capture to Disk Toggle
- 4.2 Send Brag Tape
- 4.3 Transmit Callsign Sequence
- 4.4 Send/talk Brag Tape
- 4.5 Show Packet MHlist and Point and Shoot Connect
- 4.6 Auto CQ Call
- 4.7 Activate Type Ahead Buffer/AMTOR Relink
- 4.8 Disconnect/Receive
- 4.9 Put TNC in CMD Mode
- 4.10 Put TNC in CONVERSE /Transmit Mode /AMTOR FEC
- 4.11 Alternate Function Keys
- 4.12 Shift Function Keys
- 4.13 Control Function Keys
-
- 5.0 Main Menu
- 5.1 Quick Menu
- 5.2 Auto CQ
- 5.3 Send Brag Tape
- 5.4 Call Someone
- 5.5 Log Menu
- 5.6 Change Mode
- 5.7 Call CQ
- 5.8 Send/Talk File
- 5.9 QRZ
- 5.10 Send/Talk LAN-LINK files 001..010
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 3
-
-
-
- 6.0 BBS Menu
- 6.1 Download Text Files
-
- 7.0 Call Menu
- 7.1 Alert Call/ARQ Call
- 7.2 Connect/Call
- 7.3 Enter Call
- 7.4 reMember Path
- 7.5 Packet Cluster
- 7.6 Call CQ
- 7.7 Retry
- 7.8 Show Directory
- 7.9 Target Call
- 7.10 aUto CQ
- 7.11 Toggle DX Flag
- 7.12 Zap BBS
- 7.13 Zap BBS on Next Mail Beacon
-
- 8.0 Edit Menu
- 8.1 Edit Brag Tape
- 8.2 Edit Call Directory File
- 8.3 Edit any other file
- 8.4 Answer Ctdsk File (Split Screen)
- 8.5 Answer Incoming Messages (Split Screen)
- 8.6 Leave Note for Someone
- 8.7 Edit Capture-to-Disk File
- 8.8 Edit Two files (Split Screen)
- 8.9 Edit LAN-LINK.SYS File
- 8.10 Edit LAN-LINK.001 through LAN-LINK.010 files
- 8.11 Pick Capture-to-disk to Edit
- 8.12 Pick Message file to Edit
- 8.13 Leave Messages on your local BBS
-
- 9.0 Event/Clock Menu
- 9.1 Set Alarm
- 9.2 Connect
- 9.3 Display Event
- 9.4 Periodic Event
- 9.5 Turn Robot ON/OFF
- 9.6 Turn Contest Mode ON/OFF
- 9.7 Time Display ON/OFF
- 9.8 Cancel Event
- 9.9 Zap BBS
-
- 10.0 Files Menu
- 10.1 Send Brag Tape
- 10.2 File Directory
- 10.3 Erase File
- 10.4 Pick Ctdsk file to View
- 10.5 Rename File
- 10.6 Send File
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 4
-
-
- 10.7 Send/Talk File
- 10.8 Send Uppercase File
- 10.9 View file
- 10.10 View Ctdsk File
- 10.11 View Incoming Message File
-
- 11.0 Function key Help Information
-
- 12.0 Jump to Dos
-
- 13.0 LAN-LINK Menu
- 13.1 :QBU: External Protocols
- 13.2 :QBM: ASCII File
- 13.3 :QSM: Message
- 13.4 :QSP: Message
- 13.5 :QDB: ASCII File
- 13.6 :QRU: Messages
- 13.7 :QRA: Who is "ON-LINE"
- 13.8 :QTA: Messages
- 13.9 :QZD: Binary Files
- 13.10 :QZU: Binary Files
-
- 14.0 Log Menu
- Log Mode Function Keys
- 14.0.1 Alt-A Append Entry
- 14.0.2 Alt-E Edit Log Entry
- 14.0.3 Alt-F Find an Entry
- 14.0.4 Alt-S Scan Log by Call
- 14.0.5 Alt-U Toggle Delete Mark
- 14.0.6 Alt-Z Pack Log
- 14.0.7 Ins Toggle Insert Mode
- 14.0.8 End Show Last Page
- 14.0.9 Home Show First Page
- 14.0.10 PgUp Move Up One Page
- 14.0.11 PgDn Move Down One Page
- 14.0.12 Up Arrow Move Up One Entry
- 14.0.13 Down Arrow Move Down One Entry
- 14.1 Append Entry
- 14.2 Scan Log by Band
- 14.3 Change Log
- 14.4 Find Date
- 14.5 Edit Log Entry
- 14.6 Find an Entry
- 14.7 Import-Convert Log
- 14.8 Help Function Keys
- 14.9 Scan Log by Mode
- 14.10 Print Log
- 14.11 Scan Log by Call
- 14.12 Update from Old data
- 14.13 Exit From Log Menu
- 14.14 Fuzzy Scan
- 14.15 Pick a Log file
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 5
-
-
- 14.16 Create a New Log file
-
- 15.0 Message Menu
- 15.1 BBS Command Files
- 15.2 Current Messages
- 15.3 View Message
- 15.4 Leave Note
- 15.5 Old Messages
- 15.6 Time Tag
-
- 16.0 TNC Menu
- 16.1 Set TNC Date/Time
- 16.2 Flush TNC Buffer
- 16.3 Initialize TNC
- 16.4 Show Calls Monitored List
- 16.5 Show Connect Status
- 16.6 Change CTEXT
- 16.7 Activate TNC Mailbox
- 16.8 Deactivate TNC Mailbox
-
- 17.0 AMSAT-OSCAR Menu
- 17.1 UoSAT ASCII Beacon
- 17.2 Phase 3 RTTY Beacon
- 17.3 SAREX Menu
- 17.3 1 Attack Mode ON/OFF
- 17.3.2 Change SAREX Call
- 17.3.3 SAREX Packets Capture to Disk ON/OFF
- 17.4 SAREX Orbiter Features
-
- 18.0 Parameter Menu
- 18.1 Turn Beacon Mode ON/OFF
- 18.2 Clear Connect Count
- 18.3 Turn Digipeat Detect ON/OFF
- 18.4 Turn Beacon Control ON/OFF
- 18.5 Turn Command Echo ON/OFF
- 18.6 Change Keyboard Beep Count
- 18.7 Set Message Count
- 18.8 Turn NODE Drop Link ON/OFF
- 18.9 Turn Printer ON/OFF
- 18.10 Turn QTC Snatch ON/OFF
- 18.11 Turn :QSP: Relay Flag ON/OFF
- 18.12 Turn Sound ON/OFF
- 18.13 Turn Contest Mode ON/OFF
- 18.14 Turn DCD Flag ON/OFF
- 18.15 Turn BBS Snatch ON/OFF
- 18.16 Turn Time Id. ON/OFF
- 18.17 Turn Automatic Capture-to-Disk Flag ON/OFF
- 18.18 Change BBS Parameters
- 18.18.1 Local BBS Callsign
- 18.18.2 Mail-Snatch Trigger Word
- 18.18.3 Read Request Command
- 18.19 Change Callsigns
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 6
-
-
- 18.19.1 Callsign
- 18.19.2 The SELCAL
- 18.19.3 The PacketCluster Call
- 18.20 Change Directories
- 18.20.1 QBM Download Directory
- 18.21 Enter Common Calls
- 18.22 Change File Names
- 18.22.1 VHF Logbook File (VHF.DBF)
- 18.22.2 HF Logbook File (HF.DBF)
- 18.22.3 Path Directory File (LAN-LINK.DIR)
- 18.22.4 Brag Tape (LAN-LINK.TXT)
- 18.22.5 QBU Upload File Name (QBU-TX.BAT)
- 18.22.6 QBU Download File Name (QBU-RX.BAT)
- 18.23 Change LAN-LINK Parameters
- 18.23.1 Change CQ Text
- 18.23.2 Set the Default Band
- 18.23.3 Set the Default Transmitter Power
- 18.23.4 Set CQ Delay Time Seconds
- 18.23.5 Set CQ Delay Time Minutes
- 18.23.6 Set Number of Lines in a Non Contest CQ Call
- 18.23.7 Set Shut Down Mode (QRT Flag)
- 18.23.7.1 QRT
- 18.23.7.2 QRV
- 18.23.7.3 QRV + CTEXT TOGGLE
- 18.23.7.4 BBS
- 18.23.7.5 SOLO
- 18.23.7.6 BBS+SOLO
- 18.23.8 Set Default Users
- 18.23.9 Set UTC Offset
- 18.24 Change PC Communications Parameters
- 18.24.1 The Communications Port
- 18.24.2 The Terminal Baud Rate
- 18.24.3 TNC Data Bits
- 18.24.4 TNC Parity
- 18.24.5 Number of TNC Stop Bits
- 18.25 Change Colors
- 18.25.1 OutWindow Color
- 18.25.2 StatusWindow Color
- 18.25.3 PromptWindow Color
- 18.25.4 LogWindow Color
- 18.25.5 InWindow Color
- 18.25.6 ScrollBackWindow color
- 18.25.7 MHWindow Color
- 18.25.8 Alarmwindow Color
- 18.25.9 BottomWindow Color
- 18.25.10 Emphasis Color
- 18.25.11 Prompt Color
- 18.25.12 Option Color
- 18.25.13 Connected Text Color
- 18.25.14 Computer Color
- 18.25.15 VHF Header Color
- 18.25.16 HF Header Color
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 7
-
-
- 18.25.17 Alert Call Color
- 18.25.18 Outgoing Text Color
- 18.25.19 Multi I/O Stream Color[1]
- 18.25.20 Multi I/O Stream Color[2]
- 18.25.21 Multi I/O Stream Color[3]
- 18.25.22 Multi I/O Stream Color[4]
- 18.25.23 Multi I/O Stream Color[5]
- 18.25.24 Multi I/O Stream Color[6]
- 18.25.25 Multi I/O Stream Color[7]
- 18.25.26 Multi I/O Stream Color[8]
- 18.25.27 Multi I/O Stream Color[9]
- 18.25.28 Multi I/O Stream Color[10]
- 18.26 Change SAREX Parameters
- 18.26.1 SAREX CallSign
- 18.26.2 Change SAREX Capture to Disk File
- 18.27 Update LAN-LINK.SYS
- 18.28 Verify Changes
- 18.29 Change Scan Words
- 18.30 Turn Misc. Flag ON/OFF
- 18.30.1 All Modes:- Debug or state-sequence numbers
- 18.30.2 BAUDOT Mode:- Navy MARS Protocol Verify
- 18.31 Change Band/Mode
- 18.32 Zap BBS on Next Mail Beacon
- 18.33 BBS Zap, Don't Disconnect After Sequence
-
- 19.0 Q Codes [NC/L]
-
- 20.0 Communications Modes
- 20.1 VHF PACKET
- 20.2 HF PACKET
- 20.3 ASCII (RTTY)
- 20.4 BAUDOT (RTTY)
- 20.5 MORSE (CW)
- 20.6 AMTOR (STANDBY RECEIVE)
- 20.7 AMTOR (ALIST [CHIRPCOPY])
- 20.8 SIGNAL
- 20.9 NAVTEX
-
- 21.0 Terminal Mode Menu
- 21.1 Packet Terminal Menu
- 21.1.1 Change Packet Baud Rate
- 21.1.2 CQ/Beacons
- 21.1.3 Everything
- 21.1.4 Read the Mail
- 21.1.5 Just My Station (Solo)
- 21.1.6 All Traffic
- 21.1.7 Single User Connects
- 21.1.8 Multiple User Connects
- 21.1.9 Conference
- 21.1.10 Conference Bridge On/Off
- 21.1.11 Turn Metabeacon On/Off
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 8
-
-
- 21.2 AMTOR Terminal Menu
- 21.2.1 Force Break [ACHG]
- 21.2.2 Start Mode B [FEC]
- 21.2.3 Force LETTERS case
- 21.2.4 Read the Mail [ALISTEN]
- 21.2.5 Override ROBOT/Mailbox
- 21.2.6 Standby Receive [ARQ]
- 21.2.7 Set ROBOT/Mailbox
- 21.2.8 CW Identification
- 21.2.9 Set ROBOT infinite Delay
- 21.3 Baudot Terminal Menu
- 21.3.1 Set Baud Rate
- 21.3.2 Select Shift
- 21.3.3 NAVY MARS Message Protocol
- 21.3.4 USOS On/Off
- 21.3.5 SELCAL set/reset
- 21.3.6 CW Identification
- 21.4 ASCII Terminal Menu
- 21.4.1 Set Baud Rate
- 21.4.2 Select Shift
- 21.4.3 SELCAL On/Off
- 21.4.4 CW Identification
- 21.5 CW Terminal Menu
- 21.5.1 Lock to Receive Signal
- 21.5.2 Set Morse Speed
- 21.5.3 Unlock Morse Speed
-
- 22.0 eXit to DOS
-
- 23.0 Hot Key Combinations
- 23.1 Alt-A - Alert Call (Packet)/ARQ Call/Talk (AMTOR)
- 23.2 Alt-B - Send Break/AMTOR Changeover
- 23.3 Alt-C - Call/Connect to
- 23.4 Alt-D - Disconnect or Receive
- 23.5 Alt-E - Enter Call
- 23.6 Alt-F - Flush TNC Buffer
- 23.7 Alt-J - Jump to DOS Shell
- 23.8 Alt-K - Jump to DOS Shell with Quick Return
- 23.9 Alt-L - Edit Log
- 23.10 Alt-M - Message Scan
- 23.11 Alt-N - Multi Connect Stream Next
- 23.12 Alt-O - Turn Robot On
- 23.13 Alt-P - Turn Printer ON/OFF
- 23.14 Alt-Q - Call QRZ
- 23.15 Alt-R - Retry Call/Connect
- 23.16 Alt-S - Scan Log
- 23.17 Alt-X - Exit to DOS
- 23.18 Alt-Y - Zap Packet Cluster/(BAUDOT) Send RYs
- 23.19 Alt-Z - Zap BBS
- 23.20 Alt-= - Toggle Miscellaneous Flag
- 23.21 End - > +? [Over]
- 23.22 PgUp - Scrollback (Scrolls back incoming text)
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 9
-
-
- 23.23 The HOME Key
- 23.24 The DOWN ARROW Key
- 23.25 Shift/Baudrate Control keys
- 23.26 Control-Z (Ctrl-Z or ^Z)
-
- 24.0 LAN-LINK Disk files
- 24.1 LAN-LINK.EXE
- 24.2 LAN-LINK.SYS
- 24.3 *.RUN (YYMMDD.RUN)
- 24.4 *.DBF (VHF.DBF and HF.DBF)
- 24.5 LAN-LINK.DIR
- 24.6 CONFIG.SYS
- 24.7 *.MBX
- 24.8 *.BBS
- 24.9 LAN-LINK.001 .. LAN-LINK.010
- 24.10 QBU-RX.BAT
- 24.11 QBU-TX.BAT
- 24.12 LAN-LINK.QTA
- 24.13 QZ*.BAT
-
- 25.0 Mailbox features
- 25.1 Answering Machine
- 25.2 Mail Beacon (Annunciator)
- 25.3 How to leave a message
- 25.4 Remote Beacon shutdown
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 10
-
-
- APPENDIX 1. Anomalies and Bugs
- A1.1 Command/Converse Mode anomalies
- A1.2 Buffer messages in AMTOR Beacon CQ Mode
- A1.3 FEC +? responses in AMTOR Beacon CQ Mode
- A1.4 Using a CGA card with a monochrome monitor
- A1.5 The Packet Conference Mode
- A1.6 Packet Conference Mode disconnects
- A1.7 Strange Events
- A1.8 *** DISCONNECTED
- A1.9 *** CONNECTED
- A1.10 Greek Characters on Incoming Screen
- A1.11 Dumb TNC
- A1.12 Intermittent Lockup
-
- APPENDIX 2. Local Area Network Capability
- A2.1 LAN Protocol (G3ZCZ Version)
- A2.2 Message Format
- A2.3 ASCII File Uploading/Downloading
- A2.4 Path Determination to a DX Station
- A2.5 Binary File Transfers
-
- APPENDIX 3. NC/L Dictionary
- A3.1 :QBM: ASCII File Download
- A3.2 :QDB: ASCII File Upload
- A3.3 :QMH: Monitor Heard List
- A3.4 :QSM: Send Repeat of Message
- A3.5 :QSP: Send Message
- A3.6 :QRA: Who is About?
- A3.7 :QRT: Shut Up
- A3.8 :QRU: Upload Messages in Batch
- A3.9 :QNO: Negative Response
- A3.10 :QJG: Task Completed Response
- A3.11 :QRV: Ready Response
- A3.12 :QSL: Confirmation Response
- A3.13 :QTA: Messages
- A3.14 :QTC: List of Messages
- A3.15 :QBU: External Protocol File Transfer
- A3.16 :QZU: Zmodem Binary File Transfer Upload
- A3.17 :QZD: Zmodem Binary File Transfer Download
- A3.18 :QYU: YAPP Binary File Transfer Upload (not yet
- implemented)
- A3.19 :QYD: YAPP Binary File Transfer Download (not yet
- implemented)
-
- APPENDIX 4. USING OTHER TNCs
- A4.1 TNC2 (MFJ 1270) Version 1.1.2
- A4.1.1 Default Commands
- A4.1.2 Program differences
- A4.2 TNC1 (HD-4040)
- A4.2.1 Default Commands
- A4.2.2 Program differences
- A4.3 Kaypro KPC-2
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 11
-
-
- A4.3.1 Default Commands
- A4.3.2 Program differences
- A4.4 KAM
- A4.4.1 Default Commands
- A4.4.2 Program differences
- A4.5 PK-232 EPROM Versions JUN 1987 and later
- A4.6 MFJ1278 EPROM Version 3.3
- A4.6.1 Default Commands
- A4.6.2 Program differences
- A4.7 Heath HK-21
- A4.8 PK 87/88
-
- APPENDIX 5. UPDATES/REVISION HISTORY
-
- APPENDIX 6. Registration Form
-
- APPENDIX 7. Problem Reporting Form
-
- APPENDIX 8. Other PC Software by Joe Kasser G3ZCZ
-
- APPENDIX 9. How Shareware Works
-
- ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
-
- Thanks to Milt, 4X1AA. If it wasn't for Milt, Version 1.00 would
- never have been written.
-
- Thanks to Jim, WB8QJL, who loaned me his MFJ1278 for several
- months but died in a plane accident before he got to use LAN-LINK
- on his MFJ1278.
-
- READ THIS NEXT BIT CAREFULLY
-
- I've recently received several messages via packet radio that
- were questionable as to their commercial content, I've had a
- couple that definatly were commercial in nature.
-
- As the interpretation of what is comercial and what is not, is a
- personal matter, it is with regret that I'm going to adopt the
- following policy.
-
- If your message requires me to take individual action, then
- please use my landline BBS, the post office, telephone or
- Compuserve.
-
- If you don't use packet to send queries to manufacturers of
- hardware, why do you send them to me. My packet use is for hobby
- only. Please let me keep it that way.
-
- With regrets and 73 Joe G3ZCZ@N4QQ
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 12
-
-
- 1.0 INTRODUCTION
-
- LAN-LINK is a Personal Digital Communications Terminal Program
- for a Packet Radio TNC. The program is designed to optimize the
- configuration of the TNC in each communications mode and to
- provide some smart terminal features. It takes advantage of the
- extra features of the PK-232 which is made by Advanced
- Electronics Applications Inc. It is designed to allow anyone to
- use and get the most out of their packet TNC as well as from the
- PK-232, the MFJ1278 and the KAM for Morse, ASCII, BAUDOT, AMTOR
- as well as Packet Radio communications without having to keep the
- manual handy.
-
- LAN-LINK is a sophisticated program. In its basic state it allows
- you to use the TNC in an optimal manner. It configures the TNC
- (it types the commands) for you to maximize the communications
- efficiency in the communications mode of your choice. That means,
- for example, when working Packet on HF you need to program the
- TNC parameters to different values than you would use on VHF to
- make maximum use of the mode. One significant difference is the
- length of the packet itself, for the longer it is, the greater
- the probability of QRM destroying it. This program will adjust
- the packet parameters for you.
-
- Since the computer is now involved, other features have been
- added to simplify operation, and several features have been
- automated. All these operations are performed using menus and
- function keys as documented below. It will take a while to learn
- how to use this program in a manner which suits you, read this
- document and have fun, after all, isn't that one of the purposes
- of Amateur Radio.
-
- This manual is organized by menu. It describes the operation of
- each menu option and function key in each Communications Mode.
- THE MANUAL TELLS YOU WHAT LAN-LINK CAN DO, IT DOES NOT TELL YOU
- HOW TO USE LAN-LINK.
-
- Any Terminal Node Controller (TNC) is a complex piece of
- equipment. It can operate in a Command Mode, in which you tell it
- to do something, or in a Converse Mode in which you are using it
- to talk to other stations. Many people confuse the two when first
- getting on Packet. If you monitor the channels you will recognize
- Command Mode TNC instructions on the air, and when you use the
- TNC you will receive the "error" reply when you type something
- thinking you are in the Converse Mode but are really in the
- Command Mode. LAN-LINK is designed to make Packet operation
- simple using Menus and high level (Function and Hot key
- combinations) commands.
-
- Morse, ASCII, BAUDOT communications modes are HALF DUPLEX. One
- station is transmitting at any time. You thus have to use the
- Transmit/Converse and Receive/Disconnect function keys to turn
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 13
-
-
- the transmitter on and off respectively.
-
- AMTOR is also HALF DUPLEX but has some of the attributes of full
- duplex. In this Mode you control who is talking through software,
- only one station can send data at a time, but you can type
- characters in to the buffer and they will be transmitted
- automatically when the other station turns the QSO over to you.
- Once you have linked with someone, you do not use the
- Receive/Disconnect function UNTIL THE QSO IS OVER. Both stations
- are communicating automatically thanks to the TNC. If you want
- the other operator to respond type the +? key sequence (or use
- the 'End' Key).
-
- Packet Radio communications on the other hand is a full duplex
- mode of communications. Once you have connected with someone, you
- do not use the Receive/Disconnect function UNTIL THE QSO IS OVER.
- Both stations are communicating automatically thanks to the TNC.
- If you want the other operator to respond type the > key followed
- by the 'Enter' Key, better yet, use the 'End' Key.
-
- Note Morse, AMTOR, ASCII and BAUDOT are character mode
- communications in that each character you type is sent as you
- type them. In Packet Communications, the TNC stores them up and
- sends out a burst or packet when you type the 'Enter' Key or you
- type enough characters to fill up a packet. Studies have shown
- that the human attention span when sitting at the keyboard is of
- the order of 2 seconds. If you are in a keyboard to keyboard
- packet radio connect, remember this and don't forget to use the
- 'Enter' Key frequently, especially before you stop to think about
- what to send next.
-
- Note AMTOR and PACKET are full duplex modes of communications.
- When you connect with someone, there is no need to use the
- transmit and receive function keys. In fact you will have
- problems if you do. Do not disconnect or break the link until the
- QSO is over.
-
- 1.1 PROGRAM HIGHLIGHTS
-
- Function key and Menu driven.
-
- Automatic logbook entries for Packet and Mailbox/Beacon Mode
- AMTOR Connects, semiautomatic logbook entries for other
- modes.
-
- Logbook file is dBASE compatible and can be processed by the
- LOGBOOK Package of PC-HAM by G3ZCZ for indexed listings,
- tracking of DXCC and other AWARDS, etc.
-
- Contest operation, sends standard message and automatically
- increments QSO count.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 14
-
-
- Automatic optimized configuration of the TNC for each
- communications mode.
-
- All mode Function key 'OVER' feature (End).
-
- There are 10 files with fixed names (LAN-LINK.001 through
- LAN-LINK.010) which may be viewed and transmitted by means of
- function keys. They may also be edited from the Edit Menu.
-
- Set up of TNC for AMSAT-OSCAR Telemetry reception.
-
- Time display and event scheduler.
-
- ASCII Text Editor.
-
- Customizable Colors.
-
- Access to the TNC Command Mode is provided in case the user
- wishes to override any defaults.
-
- 1.1.1 PACKET RADIO
-
- Automatic capture to disk of all packet radio connects.
- Automatic indication of the number of Packet connects.
-
- Local Area Network (LAN) message store and forward
- capability.
-
- Capable of automatic connect attempts to download a QTC from
- another station in the LAN.
-
- Capable of automatic connect attempts to a packet BBS to
- download your incoming messages, when your callsign appears
- on the BBS mail beacon annunciator.
-
- Capable of automatically requesting Bulletins on subjects
- that interest you from your local packet BBS.
-
- Digipeat monitoring and capture.
-
- Alert signal to let you know when a predetermined call shows
- up in a packet header on frequency.
-
- Conference and Bridge modes in multiconnect situations.
-
- Path determination to DX station via :QMH:.
-
- Indicator that a specific station designated as the 'target'
- call connected in Packet Mode, or linked to AMTOR
- Beacon/Mailbox while you were away.
-
- Automatic NET/ROM and KA Node path set up from LAN-LINK.DIR
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 15
-
-
- call/path directory file.
-
- Selective answering machine and MAILBOX using NC/L command
- dialogue.
-
- Screen indication of connect by desired station (target
- call).
-
- Automatic Beacon Mode CQ caller
-
- Automatic contest (DX-pedition) mode
-
- Will call CQ repetitively and either work the connect and
- keep going after disconnect or signal you when a reply is
- received.
-
- Zmodem binary file transfer capability
-
- SAREX special features
-
- :QRA: trigger to determine who else is on channel
-
- Single keystroke Packet Cluster connect
-
- 1.1.2 AMTOR
-
- Automatic SELCAL determination.
-
- Automatic CQ caller. Will call CQ repetitively and signal you
- when a reply is received.
-
- Local Area Network (LAN) message store and forward
- capability.
-
- Selective answering machine and MAILBOX using NC/L command
- dialogue.
-
- Function key change from monitoring FEC CQ's to QSO's in
- progress (chirpcopy).
-
- Automatic Beacon Mode CQ caller
-
- Automatic contest (DX-pedition) mode
-
- Color changes between incoming and outgoing (echoed as sent)
- text.
-
- 1.1.3 MORSE/BAUDOT/ASCII
-
- Automatic CQ caller. Will call CQ repetitively and signal you
- when a reply is received.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 16
-
-
- RTTY SELCAL
-
- NAVY MARS RTTY file transmitting protocols for the PK-232.
-
- 2.0 Getting Started
-
- MAKE A BACK UP COPY OF THIS DISK, BEFORE YOU REMOVE THE WRITE
- PROTECT TAB.
-
- If you don't have a PK-232 then rename the LAN-LINK.SYS file to
- PK232.SYS and rename your TNC.SYS file as LAN-LINK.SYS. For
- example, if you are using a TNC2, perform the following
- operations in DOS.
-
- RENAME LAN-LINK.SYS PK232.SYS
- RENAME TNC2.SYS LAN-LINK.SYS
-
- For details of the rest of the customization possibilities in the
- 'LAN-LINK.SYS' file, read Section 23.2. YOU WILL NOT BE ABLE to
- change the TNC Type from within LAN-LINK. YOU MUST rename the SYS
- files BEFORE you begin the customization sequence.
-
- 2.1 Bringing LAN-LINK Up the First Time.
-
- 2.1.1 Turn on the TNC.
-
- 2.1.2 If the date and time in the PC are not set to UTC
- (GMT), set them using the DOS date and time commands.
-
- 2.1.3 Load the program by typing LAN-LINK in the way you
- normally load a program.
-
- 2.1.4 WAIT until the program says it has initialized the TNC
- and shows the band and power in the status window at
- the top of the screen.
-
- 2.1.5 If there is no battery in your TNC do what the TNC
- manual tells you to do to synchronize the TERMINAL
- baud rate to 1200 baud. In the case of the PK-232,
- LAN-LINK will send the PK-232 three * characters to
- set the PK-232 to 1200 baud.
-
- 2.1.6 After LAN-LINK has loaded, use the Parameters Menu
- option "2" to replace G8BTB with your callsign and
- Selcal information. If your TNC does not support AMTOR
- you still need a dummy entry in that line (which is
- taken care of automatically). You may also change the
- colors at this time. Use the "U" option to save the
- updated file. After reading the rest of this manual,
- you may want to change other defaults to set up LAN-
- LINK the way you like it.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 17
-
-
- 2.1.8 Use the "N" and "I" options in the TNC Menu to
- configure the TNC. Then select the desired mode of
- operation from the displayed menu by pressing the
- appropriate key.
-
- 2.1.9 Exit from LAN-LINK by using the Alt-X Key or the Esc
- Key followed by the X Key.
-
- 2.1.10 Reload LAN-LINK the same way you did before. This
- will load the edited LAN-LINK.SYS file with the new
- settings. You are now ready to use LAN-LINK. If this
- is your first time, try the Quick Menu (See Sections
- 2.2 and 5.1).
-
- 2.1.11 If you plan to use the Zmodem binary file transfer
- capability of LAN-LINK and (you are not using Com1
- serial port on your PC) or (you are not using 1200
- baud between the PC and the TNC) then you MUST
- customize all FOUR of the QZ*.BAT files as described
- in Section 24.13 and Appendix 2.5.
-
- 2.1.12 If you are updating from previous versions the
- following applies. The LAN-LINK.SYS configuration
- files are incompatible with any version earlier than
- 1.58. Thus if you are upgrading from 1.56 or earlier
- versions, use the configuration files supplied with
- this version. If you are upgrading from 1.58, ignore
- the error message you get on the first turn on, then
- bring up the Parameters Menu, and Update the
- configuration file. Review Section 18 then choose the
- LAN-LINK Parameters option and change your GMT offset.
- Note EST is 5, PST is 8 etc.
-
- NOTES
-
- If you have batteries in the TNC, make sure the TNC is set
- for a terminal baud rate of 1200, and try to run the
- program. If you see Greek characters or it doesn't work,
- remove the batteries and try again (Refer to Appendix 1.10).
- You can then replace the batteries and from then on the
- program will be correct. Make sure you leave the TNC on when
- you replace the batteries or your initialization will revert
- to the TNC default settings - the batteries are there to
- power the TNC RAM while your primary power is off.
-
- If you have trouble with a PK232MBX, then, with LAN-LINK
- running, turn the PK232MBX off, count to ten and turn it on
- again. Type one * character. If that fails, repeat this a
- few times. If it still fails, open the PK232 and remove the
- battery jumper. count to 10 slowly before replacing it and
- try again.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 18
-
-
- 2.2 Using the Quick Menu
-
- The Quick Menu is designed for new users and provides the
- most commonly used functions in a single Menu. You bring up
- the Quick Menu be touching the Escape key to access the Main
- Menu and then selecting the 'A' option.
-
- The Quick Menu is described in Section 5.1.
-
- 2.3 Connecting to Other Stations
-
- LAN-LINK treats incoming connects and outgoing connects
- differently. To connect to another station, Use the Alt-C
- hot key, Function key 5, or bring up the Quick Menu using
- the 'Esc A' character sequence as described in Section 5.1,
- or by bringing up the Call Menu via the 'Esc C' character
- sequence as described in Section 7. DO NOT TYPE 'C Call
- sign' in the command mode. If you do, the connect will still
- take place (the TNC won't know if you or LAN-LINK issued the
- command) but LAN-LINK will treat it as an incoming connect
- and issue the "[ZCZ] LAN-LINK 1.59>" handshaking signal (if
- the LAN-LINK flag is in its default, or enabled state) as
- described in Section 18. If you connect to a BBS or a Node
- this way, you will get an error message back from the BBS or
- node, since it does not recognize LAN-LINK's handshake.
-
- When you use the menu, Alt-C or F5 approach you can also
- make use of the 'path memory' feature in the LAN-LINK.DIR
- file.
-
- 2.4 Upgrading from YAPP
-
- A YAPP.CNF file is provided to facilitate conversion from
- YAPP to LAN-LINK. YAPP.CNF is a configuration file for YAPP
- Version 2 that will configure the PK-232 for YAPP and then
- back to LAN-LINK.
-
- If you are currently using YAPP, replace your YAPP.CNF file
- with this one and load YAPP. Then terminate the program in
- the normal manner by using the Alt-X Key. You should then be
- able to load and run LAN-LINK without any problems. Each
- time you subsequently want to run YAPP, YAPP will set up the
- PK-232, execute and then reconfigure the PK-232 back for
- LAN-LINK.
-
- If you are using a YAPP.DIR file, rename it to LAN-LINK.DIR.
-
- 2.5 Using Different TNCs
-
- There are differences between the command dialogue and the
- features offered by the PK-232, KAM and MFJ1278. LAN-LINK
- makes use of many of them. For example, as the KAM shows the
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 19
-
-
- HF and VHF packets as if they ware separate streams, LAN-
- LINK detects them and displays the different headers in
- different colors. As this feature is not present in the PK-
- 232, LAN-LINK does not offer it. From time to time, as each
- manufacturer updates the firmware (EPROM) in the TNC, LAN-
- LINK may be updated and incorporate them.
-
- LAN-LINK is normally loaded by typing LAN-LINK followed by
- the 'Enter' key. In this instant, LAN-LINK gets its
- configuration information from the LAN-LINK.SYS file. LAN-
- LINK.SYS is the default SYSTEM or configuration file. If you
- have more than one TNC you may want to set up different
- configuration files for each TNC.
-
- You must set up your different configuration files with the
- filetype ".SYS", examples being TNC1.SYS, TNC2.SYS, KAM.SYS,
- PK232.SYS as well as the default LAN-LINK.SYS. Edit the
- sample files on the distribution disk to customize them to
- your requirements.
-
- To load LAN-LINK with the optional configuration file, type
- 'LAN-LINK' followed by the name of the file (without the
- filetype) on the command line then press the 'Enter' Key.
- For example, if you have a PK-232 and a TNC2 and
- occasionally use the TNC2, set up the LAN-LINK.SYS file for
- the PK-232. Then type 'LAN-LINK' to run the program
- normally. On the rare occasions when you want to use the
- TNC2, you may type 'LAN-LINK TNC2' to run LAN-LINK with the
- TNC2.SYS configuration file.
-
- 2.6 Using Different HF and VHF Configuration Files
-
- You can also use two SYS files, one for HF and one for
- VHF/UHF. If you name them HF.SYS and VHF.SYS you can bring
- the relevant one up by typing
-
- 'LAN-LINK VHF' or 'LAN-LINK UHF'
-
- as desired. You can also use a different one for a contest,
- or for any reason you wish.
-
- 2.7 Using the AMTOR/PACKET Robot/Automatic Contest Station
-
- In order to use the Robot in the AMTOR Mode, you need to
- have a Brag Tape file. The default name for this file is
- LAN-LINK.TXT. If this file does not exist, you will not be
- able to activate the Robot.
-
- You activate the Robot by using the Alt-O hot key
- combination. The Robot will then call CQ and wait for a
- reply. If no reply is received, it will call again. It will
- continue to call at preset intervals until a reply is
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 20
-
-
- received (you may change the interval via the Parameters
- Menu). In AMTOR, the Brag Tape will be transmitted and one
- (and one only) transmission accepted from the linking
- station, unless the linking station uses a NC/L command on
- the same line as the +?. In that case, the Robot will
- respond to it. All incoming text will be captured to disk in
- the Capture-to-disk file (LAN-LINK.RUN). The Robot will then
- sign off and drop the link. If it has not managed to
- recognize a valid call from the linking station it will ask
- for a retransmission of the callsign.
-
- In the Packet Communications Mode, the CTEXT will ONLY be
- transmitted if you have set CMSG to ON (in the TNC Command
- Mode), the Brag Tape will not be transmitted. NC/L will be
- active. When the connecting station disconnects, the Robot
- will restart the CQ cycle.
-
- In AMTOR turn the answerback off if the Robot is on. In this
- way other stations will not be able to mess up the
- sequencer.
-
- When you touch the F8, F3, Alt-D, Alt-Q or 'End' keys, you
- turn the Robot off.
-
- The PK-232's flush command is used before each robot CQ
- message is transmitted to synchronize the text to the Robot
- software. The KAM however, does not have a way to flush its
- internal transmit buffer. Under QRM conditions or if
- stations do not sign on correctly, the sequence can get out
- of order due to the wrong text being transmitted.
-
- To use the Automatic Contest mode, enable the contest mode
- from the Parameter menu, then activate the Robot using the
- Alt-O function key. To turn the Automatic Contest Mode off,
- deselect (turn off) the contest mode from the Parameter
- Menu.
-
- 3.0 Things You Should Know
-
- 3.1 Memory Requirements
-
- LAN-LINK 1.59 requires a minimum of 450k of RAM. You will
- need more RAM if you wish to use the Editor. The Editor
- files will each take a maximum of 64K additional RAM. If
- your memory is marginal, you may get an error when you try
- to log a station or edit a file/message.
-
- 3.2 PC to TNC Communications
-
- All communications between the computer and the TNC normally
- use the 8 BIT NO PARITY and 1 stop bit RS-232 Serial Port
- configuration. You CAN THUS SEND FOREIGN LANGUAGE CHARACTERS
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 21
-
-
- FROM THE KEYBOARD OR FILES. If you want to limit the char
- acter set to the 7 bit ASCII set, set the TNC parameters
- accordingly. The baud rate defaults to 1200, but you may set
- it to 2400, 4800 9600 or even 19200 if your CPU clock is
- fast enough and the TNC will respond correctly.
-
- 3.3 Open Loop
-
- IF YOU USE THIS PROGRAM, YOU STILL MUST READ THE TNC MANUAL.
- WARNING .... THIS PROGRAM OPERATES IN AN OPEN LOOP MODE. IT
- REMEMBERS WHAT INSTRUCTIONS OR COMMANDS IT GAVE THE TNC. IF
- FOR SOME REASON, THE TNC IS NOT SYNCHRONIZED TO THE PROGRAM
- YOU WILL NOT GET CORRECT DISPLAYS ON THE SCREEN.
-
- 3.4 Problems
-
- In case you have problems, always check the default settings
- using the 'Verify Changes' option of the Parameters Menu.
- Further information is contained in Appendix 1. Problems can
- be caused by incorrect settings of the TNC parameters. If
- all else fails, (hard) reset the TNC. Make sure XFLOW and
- FLOW are OFF.
-
- 3.5 The Contents of the Status Window
-
- The indicators in the status line depend on the state of the
- LAN Link and are described in the sections that deal with
- the functions they area associated with. This section is a
- summary of the displays in the Status Window.
-
- Some typical status window displays are shown below.
-
- 2 Meters 2 Watts PACKET 1200 W [R] TRFC ->N4QQ
- 20 Meters 100 Watts MORSE TEST[4]
- 20 Meters 100 Watts PACKET 300 N TRFC
- CAPTURE TO DISK PACKET 300 N [C1][Z] TRFC ->N4QQ
-
- If the automatic Capture-to-disk is turned off, a yellow bug
- will be flashing on the left side of the line.
-
- If the Printer Flag is set, a yellow [P] will be flashing on
- the left side of the line.
-
- If the miscellaneous flag is set, an asterisk '*' followed
- by two numbers and a ']' will be displayed. The first number
- is the BBS Sequence State, the second is the Connect
- Sequence State. These numbers reflect the internal state of
- LAN-LINK and should be quoted when describing problems.
-
- If a message transfer is taking place, the callsign of the
- station involved will be displayed.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 22
-
-
- When the Capture-to-Disk is turned on, a 'CAPTURE TO DISK'
- will be shown, if it is turned off, the operating band
- (Meters) and power (Watts) will be shown. If a ZapBBS is in
- operation, the Bulletin Request Count will then be shown in
- square brackets ('[]').
-
- The communications mode will be shown next, it may be one of
- the following;
-
- PACKET AMTOR AMTOR-(MAIL) AMTOR-FEC
- BAUDOT ASCII MORSE NAVTEX
- SIGNAL ???? DEFAULT {boot up}
-
- A flashing yellow musical note following the Communications
- Mode indicates that the sound has been inhibited.
-
- The next number to be displayed is the RF communications
- baudrate. The letter 'W' or 'N' indicates that the Wide
- shift or the Narrow shift has been selected. A 'down arrow'
- will be shown if the shift is normal. If the shift is re
- versed a flashing yellow 'up arrow' will be displayed.
-
- In the BAUDOT mode, 'USOS' will be displayed if 'Unshift-on-
- space' is selected.
-
- If the Contest Mode is selected, the word 'TEST' will then
- be displayed followed by the Contest QSO number in '[]'.
-
- In certain Robot and AutoCQ states, namely while the
- computer is waiting for a reply, a flashing cumulative CQ
- count will be displayed next.
-
- If the RTTY SELCAL is active the word 'SELCAL' will be
- displayed next.
-
- If the Navy MARS BAUDOT RTTY protocol is enabled, a '[n]'
- will be displayed.
-
- In the packet and AMTOR Robot modes, if at least one station
- has connected or linked, a flashing yellow '[C]' will be
- displayed next. The number in the square brackets with the
- 'C' is the number of stations that have connected/linked. If
- the target call station was one of those station, a happy
- face will also be displayed in the square brackets.
-
- If at least one QTC snatch has taken place a flashing yellow
- '[Q]' will be displayed next. The number in the square
- brackets is the number of QTC Snatches that have taken
- place.
-
- In the packet communications mode, if a ZapBBS, a QTC Snatch
- or a PacketClusterZap is in progress a flashing yellow '[Z]'
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 23
-
-
- will be displayed next. However, if LAN-LINK is set to stay
- connected when the sequence ends, the flashing indicator
- will be a {Z} instead of a [Z].
-
- In the packet or AMTOR communications mode, a '[R]' will be
- displayed next if LAN-LINK is configured for 'store and
- forward' (:QSP:).
-
- In the packet and AMTOR communications modes, if the beacon
- mode is enabled a '[B]' will be displayed next. if someone
- has connected and sent a :QRT: sequence, the '[B]' will be
- flashing. The '[B]' will be followed by a '[M]' if there are
- messages pending. The number in the square brackets with the
- '[M]' is the number of messages (*.OUT files) pending.
-
- In the packet communications mode, if the SAREX mode is
- enabled, a '[S]' will be shown next. The '[S]' will be
- flashing while capture to disk is in progress. If SAREX
- packets have been copied a happy face will be displayed in
- the square brackets together with the 'S'. If the SAREX
- Orbiter robot is active a flashing '>>' will be displayed.
-
- In the packet communications mode, if the digipeat Detect
- mode is enabled a '[D]' will be displayed next.
-
- In the packet communications mode, the terminal sub-modes
- (see Section 21) are then displayed as follows;
-
- SOLO This lets you only see messages addressed to you.
- CQ/B This lets you see beacons and CQ calls as well.
- TRFC This lets you see packets containing messages as
- well.
- EVRY This lets you see everything on channel, including
- the link control packets.
- MAIL This lets you monitor packets from a specific
- station. In the PK-232, you can do it without
- displaying the headers.
-
- The next item to be displayed is a callsign, under the
- following conditions; the call of the station connected
- with, will be prefixed by a '*>' when connected, and by a '-
- >' when a connect request is in progress. if a disconnect is
- in progress, the callsign will be replaced by a '$$$$'. The
- callsign will be seen as flashing when a connect is in
- progress.
-
- In the MAIL mode, the callsign of the station that you are
- "reading the mail" on will be displayed, otherwise the call
- sign displayed will be that of the one you are connected to.
-
- If an Alert Call has been entered, it will be displayed
- next, similarly for a target call. The display will be
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 24
-
-
- slightly different of the calls have been heard/worked. A
- !!> before the flashing call indicates that the Alert
- function is active. A '<->' before the Alert Call signifies
- that packets to or from that call have been heard on
- frequency. A smiling face in front of the call, signifies
- that it has been worked. An '->' is displayed before the
- Target Call.
-
- The next items to be displayed are the packet multi user
- mode displays. If the conference bridge is up, a flashing
- yellow bridge will be shown. If only the conference mode is
- set, the word 'C will be flashing, if the basic multi user
- mode is set, the word 'M will be seen. The callsign will be
- prefixed by the I/O channel number/letter, and will be in
- the color allocated to the traffic on that channel. The
- number shown after the flashing letter is the number of
- streams that LAN-LINK thinks that you are connected on.
-
- In the non packet modes, the callsign displayed will be that
- of the station being worked (entered by the AMTOR robot, the
- automatic CQ call recognition, or by the operator using the
- Alt-C or Alt-E keys). In AMTOR, the SELCAL of the other
- station will also be displayed sometimes, usually if you
- entered the call.
-
- An '[L]' will be displayed in the non packet modes when a
- callsign is entered. The '[L]' will flash to remind you (to
- log it) until the QSO is logged.
-
- 3.6 Logbooks
-
- LAN-LINK uses two dBASE 3 compatible logbook files. One is
- used for VHF packet logging (VHF.DBF), the other for all HF
- modes (HF.DBF). See Section 14 for more information.
-
- 3.7 How To Get an Update
-
- There are two ways to get an updated version, as follows.
- When you register your copy of LAN-LINK, if this version is
- still current, your registration will be acknowledged, and
- the following upgrade will be sent to you automatically at
- the time it is released. If a later version exists at the
- time that you register, it will be sent to you when your
- registration is acknowledged.
-
- If you are not on the list for an automatic upgrade (ie.,
- you received a disk in the mail as a result of your
- registration), then when you hear that a new release is out,
- collect together at least 300 kBytes of traffic on your
- local vhf/uhf LAN by running LAN-LINK with the capture-to-
- disk activated when you are not connected. If you can add
- to that, connect to your local BBS and dump all current
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 25
-
-
- bulletins with full headers showing date/time into your
- capture-to-disk file. If necessary compress the file (ZIP
- preferred), and send in the disk in a mailer together with a
- label addressed to you, and sufficient return postage, and
- the upgrade will be yours. Alternatively, you may perform
- the data transfers electronically to the BBS phone number
- listed on page 1.
-
- 4.0 Function Keys
-
- Function keys are used to perform operations common to all
- communications modes, or to allow fast performance of a function
- without having to go through several layers of menus. The action
- of each of the function keys is described in the following
- sections. The function key number corresponds to the paragraph
- number, namely 4.1 refers to Function Key 1 (F1), etc.
-
- 4.1 Capture to Disk Toggle (F1)
-
- This key toggles the "capture-to-disk" command. When the
- "capture-to-disk" is active, all incoming text (including
- 'Echo as sent' outgoing text) is stored on a disk (floppy or
- hard) in a file called 'YYMMDD.RUN' where YY is the last two
- digits of the year, MM the month and DD the day (EG.
- 900824.RUN). If this file does not exist the first time that
- LAN-LINK is loaded, it is created. From that time on, for
- the rest of that day, successive activations append new data
- to the contents of the file.
-
- Each time the command is activated a datestamp (or timetag)
- will be written to the file.
-
- When a Packet station connects "capture-to-disk" will be
- activated automatically unless you instruct LAN-LINK not to
- do so with the Capture-to-disk flag (Section 18.17). Packet
- connects will thus be recorded in their entirety
- automatically unless you turn off the "Capture-to-disk"
- during the course of the QSO. "Capture-to-disk" will be
- stopped at disconnect time.
-
- You may later edit the file at your convenience with your
- favorite word processor or the included Editor. However, if
- your word processor can only handle files smaller than 64k,
- make sure that the 'capture-to-disk' file remains smaller.
- You can do this by renaming the file to something like 'LAN-
- RUN.001'. LAN-LINK will automatically close the "capture-to-
- disk" file when you terminate the program and return to DOS.
-
- You can make Capture-to-disk active when you scroll back.
- You can use this feature to save data that has already
- scrolled by the window.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 26
-
-
- 4.2 Send Brag Tape and Talk (F2).
-
- This command lets you transmit the Brag Tape (Default LAN-
- LINK.TXT. In the non packet modes, it will leave the
- transmitter on after sending the file. In the packet mode it
- will send a ^Z after sending the file to notify the
- recipient that the file is complete.
-
- 4.3 Transmit Callsign Sequence (F3)
-
- This command lets you transmit the following sequence <other
- call> DE <your call>. For example if you are 4X6AA and you
- are working G3ZCZ then this command would transmit the
- sequence 'G3ZCZ de 4X6AA'. You use this at the start and end
- of a transmission in any mode except Packet.
-
- 4.4 Send Brag Tape (F4)
-
- This command lets you transmit the Brag Tape (Default LAN-
- LINK.TXT. In the non packet modes, it will turn the
- transmitter off after sending the file.
-
- 4.5 Show Packet 'MH' list and Point and Shoot Connect (F5).
-
- This command lets you see what calls the TNC has heard
- recently on the Packet channels. You can see up to 18, with
- the data and time they were last logged by the TNC. Refer to
- the 'MH' command in the TNC manual for the particulars of
- the display.
-
- The MH list shows up in a special window and freezes until
- you depress any key. While the list is frozen, LAN-LINK is
- not monitoring received data, so don't freeze it too long.
-
- If the MH list is blank, or information comes in from the
- TNC between the time you entered the command and the time
- the list is sent back, subsequent text from the TNC will
- show up in the MH window until the next 'Cmd:' appears or 18
- lines of text have been received.
-
- You can also use this command in a point and shoot method
- for attempting a connect with a station you have heard.
- Bring up the MH Window and move the cursor to the desired
- callsign. When the cursor is positioned on any character in
- the call, press the 'Enter' Key and that call will be
- recognized as the callsign. If the call is joined to the
- word "Cmd:" or the cursor is positioned on a space or blank,
- the connect attempt will be inhibited.
-
- This command does not work on the TNC1.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 27
-
-
- 4.6 Auto CQ Call (F6)
-
- This command will send a CQ sequence, wait a preset delay
- and then repeat the CQ sequence until it receives your call
- back from someone else. When it does so, it will alert you
- with a Connect Alarm signal, reset the delay timer and
- revert to the normal or listening mode. In AMTOR it will
- revert to the mode in which it is waiting for an ARQ call
- and is able to copy FEC signals on frequency.
-
- When the Automatic CQ sequence is in operation, an
- indication will be shown in the status window. The indicator
- will be steady while the transmitter is sending the CQ text,
- and will blink while the receiver is listening for a reply.
-
- The time delay between calls is set using the 'Q' command in
- the Parameters Menu (Set CQ delay time). It is also set as a
- defined default by you when you setup your LAN-LINK.SYS
- file.
-
- The automatic CQ command will only work in the TNC non
- packet modes if the 'Echo as Sent Mode' is set to 'ON' per
- the LAN-LINK.SYS file. In other words, you must be able to
- see the CQ text slowly echo in the incoming window for the
- command to work. The reason for this is that the "K K K" (or
- "+?" in AMTOR) sequence is used to arm the software to look
- for a reply.
-
- In AMTOR you will get the connect alarm only when the
- replying station transmits the '+?' character combination.
-
- The check for the detection of your callsign and the connect
- alarm sequence only occur after a line feed character has
- been received.
-
- Under most conditions in AMTOR, many in RTTY, and some in
- MORSE, LAN-LINK will recognize the callsign of the station
- answering your CQ and display it in the status window. In
- the event that it fails completely, the sequence '--?--'
- will show up in the status window. Since the recognition
- algorithm used just looks for the first word following the
- 'DE space' sequence and assumes that it has the callsign, be
- careful to check it when operating under QRM conditions. You
- can override the automatic call selection with the Enter
- Callsign command in the Call Menu.
-
- The automatic CQ sequence is canceled when an incoming call
- is detected (only if the Beacon or Robot/Mailbox Mode is not
- selected), if you push the disconnect command key, or if you
- change communications modes.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 28
-
-
- 4.7 Activate Type Ahead Buffer/AMTOR Relink (F7)
-
- This key is not available in the Packet Communications Mode.
- It also functions somewhat differently in the AMTOR and
- other communications modes as described in the following
- sections.
-
- 4.7.1 Activate Type Ahead Buffer
-
- The use of this key sets LAN-LINK to the "Type Ahead"
- Mode. This is necessary for the PK-232 only, the KAM
- and the MFJ1278 have the feature built in. Any
- characters then typed at the keyboard will be placed
- into the TNC transmit buffer. The contents of the
- buffer will be transmitted over the air when the
- transmit command is invoked with Function Key 10 [F10].
-
- This feature allows you to 'type-ahead' as you can
- enter text into the transmit buffer while viewing
- incoming words in the INPUT window in the screen. Any
- characters typed from the keyboard will be echoed in
- the OUTGOING window on the screen.
-
- 4.7.2 AMTOR Relink
-
- If you return to the Command Mode when linked to
- another station in AMTOR, use this key to get back to
- the Converse Mode. If the link times out, you can try
- to relink with this key if you have entered the SELCAL
- of the other station.
-
- 4.8 Disconnect, Disengage or Receive (F8)
-
- This function key returns the station to the receive
- communications (TNC command) mode. It may also be used to
- abort the automatic CQ sequence. If you use it to abort a CQ
- sequence while the transmission is in progress, you may also
- want to flush the PK-232 transmit buffer by using the Flush
- command in the TNC Menu or the Alt-F hot key combination.
-
- In a multiconnect situation the program will prompt you to
- tell it which I/O channel to disconnect.
-
- In AMTOR this command key toggles LAN-LINK between the
- Chirpcopy Mode (listening to a QSO in progress) and
- monitoring FEC transmissions (CQ calls).
-
- 4.9 Put TNC in CMD Mode (F9)
-
- This command puts the TNC into the Command Mode. At this
- time, the program is transparent and acts as a dumb terminal
- (except for placing incoming and outgoing text in the
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 29
-
-
- relevant windows). You use this Mode for overriding any of
- the TNC default conditions. (SEE I TOLD YOU that YOU HAD TO
- READ THE TNC MANUAL).
-
- 4.10 Put TNC in CONVERSE /Transmit Mode /AMTOR FEC (F10)
-
- This command places the TNC into the transmit or Converse
- Mode. The transmitter is turned on and the contents of the
- transmit buffer are transmitted. In the non packet communi
- cations modes, the outgoing characters will be echoed back
- from the TNC and displayed in the INCOMING window on the CRT
- as they are transmitted on the air.
-
- In the AMTOR modes this key puts the TNC in the FEC Mode and
- turns the transmitter on.
-
- 4.11 Alternate Function Keys
-
- These keys transmit the files with the fixed names LAN-
- LINK.001 through LAN-LINK.010 (the suffix number corresponds
- to the function key) which must be located in the same
- directory as the LAN-LINK.EXE program. The transmitter is
- left on when the file has been sent.
-
- 4.11.1 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.001
- 4.11.2 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.002
- 4.11.3 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.003
- 4.11.4 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.004
- 4.11.5 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.005
- 4.11.6 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.006
- 4.11.7 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.007
- 4.11.8 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.008
- 4.11.9 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.009
- 4.11.10 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.010
-
- In the non packet communications modes, the transmitter is
- left on when the file has been sent. In AMTOR, the change
- over character pair (+?) is not sent.
-
- 4.12 Shift Function Keys
-
- These function keys show the contents of the files with the
- fixed names LAN-LINK.001 through LAN-LINK.010 (the suffix
- number corresponds to the function key) which must be
- located in the same directory as the LAN-LINK.EXE program.
-
- 4.12.1 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.001
- 4.12.2 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.002
- 4.12.3 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.003
- 4.12.4 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.004
- 4.12.5 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.005
- 4.12.6 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.006
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 30
-
-
- 4.12.7 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.007
- 4.12.8 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.008
- 4.12.9 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.009
- 4.12.10 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.010
-
- 4.13 Control Function Keys
-
- These function keys show the first lines of the files with
- the fixed names LAN-LINK.001 through LAN-LINK.010 (the
- suffix number corresponds to the function key) which must be
- located in the same directory as the LAN-LINK.EXE program.
-
- 5.0 Main menu
-
- When you press the Escape Key, the Main Menu appears on your
- screen and provides a number of choices which are described in
- the following sections.
- A Quick menu
- B BBS Menu
- C Call Menu
- D eDit Menu
- E Event Menu
- F Files Menu
- H Help for function keys
- J Jump to DOS Shell
- K LAN-LINK Menu
- L Log Menu
- M Message Menu
- N TNC Menu
- O AMSAT-OSCAR Menu
- P Parameter Menu
- Q Q Codes [NC/L]
- S communicationS Mode Menu
- T Terminal Mode Menu
- X eXit LAN-LINK
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- NOTE: Different options will show up in each menu depending on
- the connect state (in packet) or the type of TNC that you are
- using. For example, if you are using a TNC that only supports
- packet, the non packet menus will not be seen. An other example
- is that the BBS Menu is only active when you are connected to
- another station.
-
- 5.1 The Quick Menu
-
- The Quick Menu is designed for new users and provides the
- most commonly used functions in a single Menu. The Quick
- Menu Provides the following options.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 31
-
-
- A Auto CQ
- B Send Brag Tape
- C Call Someone
- L Log Menu
- M Change Communications Mode
- Q Call CQ
- S Send/Talk File
- Z QRZ
- 1..0 Send/Talk LAN-LINK files 001..010
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice. Each option
- is described below.
-
- 5.2 Auto CQ
-
- This option initiates the automatic CQ sequence in which
- LAN-lINK sends out a CQ call, listens for a reply, and if
- none is received, sends out another CQ call, and so on, ad
- infinitum. It is the same as using Function Key 6 (F6) and
- is described in Section 4.6.
-
- 5.3 Send Brag Tape
-
- This option transmits the Brag Tape is the same as using
- Function Key 2 (F2) and is described in Section 4.4 and
- 10.3.
-
- 5.4 Call Someone
-
- This option is used when you want to call or connect to
- another station. It is described in Section 7.2.
-
- 5.5 Log Menu
-
- This option invokes the logbook, described in Section 14.
-
- 5.6 Change Communications Mode
-
- This option invokes the Communications Mode Menu, described
- in Section 20. You use it to change TNC communications
- modes.
-
- 5.7 Call CQ
-
- This option described in Section 7.6 is used to initiate a
- single CQ call.
-
- 5.8 Send/Talk File
-
- This option is used to send a file. When the file has been
- sent, the transmitter will stay on. This option performs the
- same function as does Function Key 4 (F4).
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 32
-
-
-
- 5.9 QRZ
-
- This option is the same as using Alternate Q Function Key
- (Alt-Q) and is described in Section TBS.
-
- 5.10 Send/Talk LAN-LINK files 001..010
-
- This option is used to transmit the contents one of the LAN-
- LINK buffer files. You select the number, LAN-LINK does the
- rest. The option is the same as that provided by the
- Alternate Function Keys and is described in Section 4.11.
-
- 6.0 The BBS Menu
-
- This menu gives you smart file transfer capabilities with a BBS.
- The menu is only active when you are connected to another packet
- station. The BBS Menu provides the following capability.
-
- D Download Text Files.
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- 6.1 Download Text Files
-
- This option lets you download a text file from the BBS into
- a separate text file on your disk. Enter the full BBS
- download command at the prompt line.
-
- To download a file from a W0RLI BBS such as FILENAME.TYP in
- the A subdirectory you'd enter 'DA FILENAME.TYP'. To
- download the same file from the PACKET subdirectory of a
- WA7MBL BBS you'd enter the command 'D \PACKET\FILENAME.TYP'.
-
- If you use the 'D' command to download a text file, it will
- end up in a separate file on your disk ONLY IF a file of the
- same name does not exist on your drive. If a file with the
- selected name already exists on your disk drive you will get
- an error message.
-
- 7.0 The Call Menu
-
- The call menu is used to enter calls, either to call/connect/link
- a station or to remember a call or path. Each time you are
- prompted for a call, LAN-LINK will remember the previous 15 calls
- and you may use the Up and Down arrows to move the cursor to a
- remembered call. If you wish to capture a call from the incoming
- text window, push Function Key 10 (F10) to enter the window and
- move the cursor to the desired callsign. When the cursor is
- positioned on any character in the text, push the 'Enter' Key and
- that word will be recognized as the callsign. Any characters
- joined to the call (such as a '.') will be picked up as part of
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 33
-
-
- the call. If the cursor is positioned on a space or blank, the
- connect attempt will be inhibited.
-
- In AMTOR, whenever you are asked to enter a callsign, LAN-LINK
- will prompt you with its guess at the SELCAL. If you agree with
- it, just press the 'Enter' Key, if you disagree, enter your
- choice over the prompt version.
-
- The Call Menu provides the following choices.
-
- A Alert Call (packet) or ARQ Call Talk (AMTOR)
- C Connect/Call
- D Show Directory
- E Enter Call
- M reMember Path
- P Packet Cluster
- Q Call CQ
- R Retry
- T Target Call
- U aUto CQ
- X Set DX Flag On/Off
- Z Zap BBS
- ! Zap BBS on next Mail Beacon
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- 7.1 Alert Call/ARQ Call
-
- 7.1.1 Alert Call
-
- The Alert call feature is used in the Packet
- Communications Mode when disconnected and the terminal
- set for 'TRFC' or 'CQ/BEACON'. LAN-LINK will scan the
- packet headers received from the TNC, and, when it sees
- a packet originated (or digipeated if the MRPT
- parameter in the TNC is set to 'ON'), by the station
- whose call you have entered as the 'Alert' call, it
- will sound an alarm at the console. The line containing
- the packet header will also be displayed in light
- green.
-
- This option toggles the Alert call feature on and off.
- If it is off, you are prompted for the call to be
- monitored, and, if it is on, it is turned off. The
- toggle is set when you enter a callsign, and cleared
- when you depress the 'Enter' Key instead of a callsign.
-
- The Alert call will be shown flashing in the status
- window when in the disconnected state.
-
- NOTE: If the terminal is set for 'CQ/BEACON' the Alert
- will only sound if the specified station transmits CQ
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 34
-
-
- or BEACON packets.
-
- 7.1.2 ARQ Call
-
- In AMTOR, this option will attempt to send an ARQ call
- to the desired station, transmit the callsign sequence
- when linked and allow you to continue typing text (Note
- that the C option sends the '+?' after the callsign
- sequence).
-
- 7.2 Connect/Call
-
- This option works in almost the same manner in both the
- packet and non packet communications modes as described in
- the following sections.
-
- 7.2.1 Non packet Modes
-
- You use this option to call a station heard on the
- band. In AMTOR the link request will be sent in the ARQ
- Mode to the SELCAL of the desired station.
-
- 7.2.2 Packet Mode
-
- You use this option to attempt a connect with another
- packet station. In a multiconnect situation the LAN-
- LINK will automatically select a free I/O channel to
- try the connect.
-
- 7.2.2.1 Names, Handles and Paths
-
- If you so desire, you can create a directory file
- (default name is LAN-LINK.DIR) and keep a list of names
- and calls. The computer will look up a name and call
- the station by its callsign. For example if you put
-
- Joe G3ZCZ
-
- as a line in the file, when you tell the computer to
- connect to Joe, it will try to connect to G3ZCZ. If you
- enter
-
- 4X4HF 4X4HF V 4X1AA, 4Z4ZB, 4X4IL
-
- you only need to type '4X4HF' to set up the correct
- connect path.
-
- You can also use this feature to automate a NET/ROM
- and/or a KA Node path connection.
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 35
-
-
- 7.2.2.2 NET/ROM and TheLink
-
- In the manual NET/ROM path setting up mode, you would
- first connect to your local node, then when you are
- connected with it, connect to the next node, and so on
- through any intermediate nodes within the whole path
- before you finally connect with your destination
- station. You may also have digipeaters in any of the
- paths.
-
- For example if you wish to connect to K1HTV who is in
- range of the SSCT node, and you are in Washington DC,
- you might first have to connect to your local NET/ROM
- node (ELK) via a digipeater, then each of the
- intermediate nodes, SNJ3, NNJ, WMA before you could try
- to connect with K1HTV.
-
- Consider the manual sequence to make the connection.
- K1HTV is the station the contact is being attempted
- with, and he is located within range of the SCCT
- NET/ROM node. The station attempting the connect is
- located in the Washington DC area one digipeat away
- from the ELK NET/ROM node.
-
- The connection to the local node is performed first.
- The operator has to type 'C ELK v WB4APR-5' to make
- that link. When the connect with the node is achieved,
- the operator must type 'C SNJ3' to connect to the next
- node. Each time the connection is made, the operator
- must type in the command to make the next one, until
- finally the last node is reached and a connect request
- can be made to the destination station (either direct
- or via a digipeater). Sometimes there may be an
- intermediate non-NET/ROM connection between two
- stations somewhere in the path.
-
- This procedure is tedious and time consuming, because
- it may take several seconds to complete each stage of
- the link. LAN-LINK automates this sequence by scanning
- the line in the LAN-LINK.DIR file associated with the
- callsign entered and transmitting each section of the
- line when it recognizes the 'Connected to' reply from
- each NET/ROM node in the path. When it finally gets to
- the destination it sounds a chime to alert you that the
- connect has been achieved.
-
- The LAN-LINK.DIR file entry for this path is as
- follows:
-
- K1HTV ELK v WB4APR-5!SNJ3!NNJ!WMA!SCCT!K1HTV
-
- where the '!' separates each stage of the link.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 36
-
-
-
- The key word is K1HTV. LAN-LINK then scans the line to
- see if there is a '!' in it. If there is it knows that
- it is dealing with a NET/ROM path. It then tells the
- TNC to attempt a connect with the characters following
- the key word up to the first '!'. In this case it tells
- the TNC to connect to ELK via WB4APR-5. When the TNC
- sends back the connected message, LAN-LINK tells the
- TNC to try to connect to the next node in the path,
- namely in this example, SNJ3. The sequence continues
- each time a connection is made until the link is
- complete.
-
- To set up a directory entry just use the format shown
- above. Place a '!' sign after the uplink path and
- different node segments. Do not place one after the
- downlink path.
-
- Depending on the configuration, LAN-LINK will issue a
- 'disconnect' command to the TNC in the event the
- NET/ROM or KA-Node connect attempt fails. This feature
- is designed for known paths not for general path
- determination.
-
- 7.2.2.3 KA-Nodes
-
- You can connect or cross connect via KA-Nodes using the
- directory file. You must still use the ! separators as
- well as two new symbols % and &. Use % for 'C' and &
- for 'X' in KA-Node links..
-
- For example, given that a path to W9TNN-2 is first to a
- local KA node [JRW] then to a second node on the same
- VHF frequency [W3EAX-7] and lastly via a cross connect
- on 40 Meters to W9TNN-2, the line in the LAN-LINK.DIR
- file would be as follows.
-
- w9tnn-2 jrw!%w3eax-7!&w9tnn-2
-
- You can mix NET/ROM and KA-Node paths as in:
-
- n7dva!g3zcz-9!&WA6IEL-4!n7dva v kl7vz-3
-
- The different symbols are used for the KA node to tell
- LAN-LINK which replies to look for as well as what to
- prefix the call with.
-
- Depending on the Node Drop Link Flag configuration,
- LAN-LINK will issue a 'disconnect' command to the TNC
- in the event the NET/ROM or KA-Node connect attempt
- fails. This feature is designed for known paths not for
- general path determination.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 37
-
-
-
- 7.2.2.4 Loop Backs
-
- In the Packet Communications Mode, if you want to loop
- back through someone else you would have to type
-
- C <yourcall> V <hiscall>.
-
- For example if I (G3ZCZ) wanted to loop back through
- 4X6AA, I would have to type the command
-
- C G3ZCZ V 4X6AA
-
- to the TNC.
-
- In LAN-LINK you just have to enter the '/' character
- followed by the call of the station you want to loop
- back through. For example if I (G3ZCZ) wanted to loop
- back through 4X6AA, I just need to enter
-
- /4X6AA
-
- as the call to connect to at the correct prompt, and
- LAN-LINK will tell the TNC to try to connect to G3ZCZ
- via 4X6AA, namely issue the command 'C G3ZCZ V 4X6AA'
- to the TNC.
-
- 7.3 Enter Call
-
- This option lets you enter the call of any station calling
- you into the program. If you type the Enter Key in response
- to the prompt, you can later use Function Key (F3) to
- transmit the sequence "DE <yourcall>". You may also use the
- Retry feature to call that station.
-
- In AMTOR, you use the feature to enter the callsign and
- SELCAL of the station you are listening to and may want to
- call later.
-
- 7.4 ReMember Path
-
- You may use this option to put an entry in the LAN-LINK.DIR
- file.
-
- 7.5 Zap Packet Cluster
-
- This option firsts prompts you with the callsign of the
- PacketCluster. If you enter a callsign, the entered callsign
- will become the new PacketCluster call. LAN-LINK then issues
- a connect request to the PacketCluster. When the connection
- is achieved, and the PacketCluster sends you a '>' character
- at the end of a line of text, LAN-LINK will issue a
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 38
-
-
-
- 'SHOW/WWV' command followed by a 'SHOW/DX'
-
- command to the PacketCluster and return to manual operation.
-
- Note: PacketCluster is a specialized BBS/conference by
- Pavilion Software for DX chasers.
-
- 7.6 Call CQ
-
- You use this command key to call CQ. In the Packet
- Communications Mode, the TNC will transmit a line of text
- along with the CQ packet. The line of text is set up in the
- LAN-LINK.SYS file described in Section 22.
-
- In the AMTOR Communications Mode, your SELCAL will be
- transmitted along with the CQ call in the FEC Mode.
-
- 7.7 Retry
-
- This option (also activated by the Alt-R function key)
- allows you to retry a connect that for some reason did not
- go through the first time. It saves wear and tear on your
- fingers particularly if the desired connect path is via a
- number of digipeat relays or through a number of NET/ROM
- NODES.
-
- In the non packet modes, it allows you to retransmit a call
- to another station without having to reenter the call.
-
- If you have previously used the Enter feature to put a
- callsign in the program when you hear that station, you can
- then use the Retry command to call him later when the QSO in
- progress terminates.
-
- 7.8 Show Call Directory
-
- This option displays the contents of the call directory file
- (LAN-LINK.DIR).
-
- 7.9 Target Call
-
- The Target call feature is used in the Packet Communications
- Mode when disconnected. LAN-LINK will monitor the stations
- connecting to you. When it sees a connect by the station
- which you have entered as the 'Target' call, it will set the
- flashing Connect Count display to show a 'happy face'.
-
- This option toggles the Target call feature on and off. If
- it is off, you are prompted for the call to be monitored, if
- it is on, it is turned off. The toggle is set when you enter
- a callsign, and cleared when you press the 'Enter' Key
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 39
-
-
- instead of a callsign.
-
- The Target call will be shown flashing in the status window
- when in the disconnected state.
-
- 7.10 Auto CQ
-
- This option is the same as Function Key 6 (F6).
-
- 7.11 Toggle DX Flag
-
- LAN-LINK allows you to call either 'CQ' or 'CQ DX'. If this
- flag is set, all CQ calls will be to "CQ DX". If it is
- cleared, all CQ calls will be plain CQ's.
-
- 7.12 Zap BBS
-
- The BBS Mail Snatch can be initiated in two ways. It can be
- initiated when your incoming screen displays a "Mail" beacon
- (received from your local BBS) with your call in the first
- line following the header, or by LAN-LINK's Zap BBS
- function. The automatic BBS Zap will not take place if LAN-
- LINK is in the multi-user mode.
-
- In the event of a BBS Mail-Snatch, if the *.BBS file exists
- for that BBS, the file will be processed and the contents
- sent to the BBS. Thus if you don't get a chance to send the
- mail before LAN-LINK downloads the mail from the BBS, it
- will send it for you.
-
- When the BBS has accepted the commands the name of the file
- is changed from '*.BBS' to '*.n', where 'n' is a number
- increasing sequentially each time the function is performed.
- For example, the file name KE8X.BBS will be changed to
- KE8X.001 the first time it happens. In this way, you will
- have a copy of the outgoing file on your disk until you
- choose to delete it.
-
- In the real world however, message formats are nonstandard,
- and can contain any set of characters. The algorithm
- developed here transmits the next line in the *.BBS file
- when LAN-LINK sees a 'trigger' character-string unless one
- of the 'inhibitor' character-strings is also present on the
- line of the message text received by LAN-LINK.
-
- These 'trigger' character-strings are '>' (as the last
- character of the line of text ), 'Enter', 'Subject', 'Sj:'
- and 'Msg:'. The 'inhibitor' character-strings are 'R:', '<'
- and 'Message'(R: as in routing headers and < and Message as
- in Message-Id: <message number> in message headers).
-
- This should cover most simulated manual BBS message reading
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 40
-
-
- (WA7MBL and W0RLI/VE3GYQ) and avoid false triggering due to
- '>'s showing up in message and routing headers.
-
- NOTE that when LAN-LINK finishes processing the *.BBS file,
- it will send a 'B' command to the BBS to terminate the
- session. This feature is designed to minimize the time you
- spend connected to the BBS by allowing you to scan the
- message list when automatically receiving your mail, prepare
- your replies and download requests off-line and then later
- read the incoming messages or files without tying up the
- BBS. It thus positively disconnects you from the BBS.
-
- In the Packet Communications Mode, the Alt-Z key initiates a
- BBS Mail Snatch. You use this key if you connect to a BBS
- before you hear its beacon, or if you have disabled the BBS
- Mail Snatch feature. If you are connected to a BBS, the key
- must be used BEFORE the first '>' is received. The first '>'
- triggers the sequence. If you have already received that
- first '>', send the BBS any command, and the sequence should
- begin when the BBS signals that it has completed processing
- that command. If you are not connected, LAN-LINK will first
- try to connect to the BBS, then perform the sequence.
-
- When you use this command you will be asked if you want to
- upload or download. If you want to download, just push the
- 'Enter' Key. A Download (Mail from the BBS to you) will
- automatically be followed by an Upload if the *.BBS file
- exists.
-
- The download sequence performed by the BBS Mail Snatch is as
- follows:
-
- RM To read your messages, (Configurable)
- L To let you know what is new on the BBS,
- LM To list ALL your messages on the BBS,
- B To log you off the BBS.
-
- LAN-LINK will wait for the '>' as the last character of the
- line of text being received from the BBS, before issuing the
- next command in the sequence. Your messages will be placed
- in a message file <yourcall>.OUT as if someone else had left
- a message for you.
-
- The 'RM' may be customized in the LAN-LINK.SYS file to 'RN'
- or 'VM' depending on the software in your local BBS and your
- preference.
-
- During the time that the BBS is responding to the 'L'
- command with a list of new messages, LAN-LINK is scanning
- the lines containing the messages to see if it finds one
- containing a Scan Word. If it does it will queue a request
- to download that message.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 41
-
-
-
- If you wish to add a 'KM' to the sequence, place it in the
- BBS.BBS file. If you use 'KM' as you may delete mail BEFORE
- reading it.
-
- If you use the 'D' command to download a text file, the file
- will end up in a separate file on your disk ONLY IF a file
- of the same name does not exist on your drive.
-
- Do delete 'read' mail from your local BBS. Don't clutter the
- BBS's disk with your read mail. The 'LM' command is built
- into LAN-LINK to remind you of what you have out there.
-
- The BBS 'S' command (including its variations such as 'SP')
- is the only multiple line command allowed. You can thus put
- all the single line commands such as D, H, ?, L, and R in
- the BBS.BBS file.
-
- A 'multiple command' is defined in this instance as a
- command which allows you to enter multiple lines before the
- BBS will send back a '>' character (i.e. one that the BBS
- tells you to type in text and terminate it with the Control
- Z character).
-
- Each message must be in the format expected by the BBS and
- must end with the " :EOF: " character string, but there is
- no need for any special end of BBS file character.
-
- A typical message could be as shown below.
- SP G3ZCZ @ N4QQ
- LAN-LINK
- I think it is great. However, why don't you change the
- following...... (add your comments here).
-
- :EOF: {last line may also be '/EX'}
-
- 7.13 Zap BBS on Next Mail Beacon
-
- This option causes LAN-LINK to Zap your local BBS next time
- it beacons with a list of calls for which it has Mail. You
- set this option active when you want to upload a set of
- messages, or are not sure if there are any messages waiting
- for you on the BBS. A typical situation is where there are a
- lot of NTS messages stacked up in the BBS.BBS file waiting
- to go. This parameter will be reset when the connect goes
- through, so if the Zap attempt failed, it will try again on
- the following Mail beacon. This will not work in the Multi-
- user mode.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 42
-
-
- 8.0 Edit Menu
-
- This menu provides the following choices.
-
- B Brag Tape
- D Call Directory File
- F Any other File
- K Answer Ctdsk File
- L Leave messages on your local BBS
- M Answer Incoming Mail
- N Note
- O Pick *.OUT (Message) File to Edit
- P Pick Ctdsk File to Edit
- R Capture to Disk File
- S LAN-LINK.SYS
- T Two Files
- 1,2 - 0 LAN-LINK.001 - 010
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- LAN-LINK contains an ASCII text editor suitable for files less
- than 64k in size. It is built based on Borland's Turbo Pascal
- Editor Toolbox and the commands are compatible with Sidekick and
- Wordstar. A summary of the editor commands is shown below.
-
- F10 Switch Windows (if more than one window open)
-
- Backspace Delete left char
- Del Delete Char
- Enter New line
- Ins Toggle insert mode
- PgUp Move cursor up one page
- PgDn Move cursor down one page
-
- ^A Move cursor left one word
- ^C Move cursor down one page
- ^D Move cursor right one character
- ^E Move cursor up one line
- ^F Move cursor right one word
- ^G Delete one character
- ^H Delete left one character
- ^I Tab
- ^L Find/replace next occurrence
- ^P Insert a control character into the text
- ^M New line
- ^N Insert line
- ^R Move cursor up one page
- ^S Move cursor left one character
- ^T Delete one word after cursor
- ^V Toggle insert mode
- ^W Scroll up
- ^X Move cursor down one line
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 43
-
-
- ^Y Delete line at cursor
- ^Z Scroll down
-
- ^K^B Mark beginning of block
- ^K^C Copy block to position of cursor
- ^K^D Save file and exit edit
- ^K^H Hide block marker
- ^K^K Mark end of block
- ^K^Q Abandon file and exit edit
- ^K^R Read file into screen
- ^K^T Mark single word as block
- ^K^V Move block to position of cursor
- ^K^W Write block to disk file
- ^K^Y Delete block
- ^K 1..9 Set marker 1 .. 9
-
- ^Q^A Find text and replace
- ^Q^B Move to beginning of block
- ^Q^C Move to end of file
- ^Q^D Move to right of line
- ^Q^E Move to top of window
- ^Q^F Find text
- ^Q^I Toggle autoindent mode
- ^Q^K Move to end of block
- ^Q^R Move to top of file
- ^Q^S Move to left of line
- ^Q^X Move to bottom of window
- ^Q^Y Delete to end of line
- ^Q 1..9 Jump to marker 1..9
-
- The following options can be set in the Find/Find and Re
- place (^Qf and ^Qa) operations.
-
- # locates #th occurrence
- G global replace
- N replace without Y/N question
- U ignore upper case/lower case
- W match whole words only
-
- Notes
-
- 1 The ^ key in front of a character identifies that character as
- a 'control' character. To activate it, hold down the Control
- key AND the character key.
-
- 2 Some of the commands require two keystrokes.
-
- 3 Use ^P to embed a control character in the text. For example,
- if you are creating a file containing commands to be sent to
- the TNC, to enter a control-C character into the file, use the
- ^P^C sequence of keystrokes.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 44
-
-
- WHILE USING THE EDITOR, LAN-LINK can't receive and process
- characters from the TNC. All other features ARE INHIBITED OR
- LOCKED OUT. THUS IF SOMEONE CONNECTS TO YOU, THE TNC WILL KNOW
- BUT LAN-LINK WILL NOT. BE WARNED !!!
-
- The Edit menu allows you to call up the various files for editing
- as follows.
-
- 8.1 Edit Brag Tape
-
- This option allows you to create and edit the Brag Tape File
- (LAN-LINK.TXT).
-
- 8.2 Edit Call Directory file
-
- This option allows you to create and edit the Call Directory
- File (LAN-LINK.DIR).
-
- 8.3 Edit any other file
-
- This option allows you to create and edit any other file.
-
- 8.4 Answer Ctdsk File (Split Screen)
-
- This option allows you to edit the capture-to-disk file and
- reply to incoming bulletins/messages in a split screen mode.
- The contents of the incoming bulletins and messages will be
- displayed in the top window, and the reply file in the lower
- window. The reply file is assumed to be named according to
- the Zap convention (*.BBS file). You will have to set up the
- replies/outgoing messages in the form shown below.
-
- SP Call @ BBS
- Subject of the message
-
- content lines
-
- End the message with either
-
- ':EOF:' , '/ex' or '/EX'
-
- as the first word on a separate line (without the '). For
- example,
-
- SP G3ZCZ@N4QQ
- Test
- This is a test
-
- 73
- /ex
-
- Use Function key 10 (F10) to switch windows. At this time
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 45
-
-
- you cannot transfer text between windows.
-
- 8.5 Answer Incoming Messages (Split Screen)
-
- This option allows you to answer incoming messages in a
- split screen mode. The contents of the incoming messages
- will be displayed in the top window, and the reply file in
- the lower window. The reply file is assumed to be named
- according to the Zap convention (LOCAL-BBS.BBS file). Reply
- messages are set up as described in Section 8.4.
-
- Use Function key 10 (F10) to switch windows. At this time
- you cannot transfer text between windows.
-
- 8.6 Leave Note for Someone
-
- In all modes you can leave a brief note (message) for
- another station. When you invoke this option, you will be
- prompted for the call of the station that you want to leave
- a note for. The date/time header is written to the message
- file, then as you enter the text it is stored on the disk in
- the usual format.
-
- After you have left the note and received the 'QSL' message
- from LAN-LINK, if you are in the Packet Communications Mode,
- press Function Key 8 (F8) or Alt-D to load the callsign of
- the recipient into the beacon.
-
- When you leave a note, leave it for the root call of the
- connectee, for example to leave a note for G3ZCZ/W3 leave it
- for G3ZCZ, similarly to leave a note for WB8WKA-1 leave it
- for WB8WKA. LAN-LINK is smart enough to extract the root
- call from any callsign it links/connects with.
-
- 8.7 Edit Capture-to-Disk file
-
- This option allows you to edit the Capture-to-Disk file as
- long as it is smaller than 64k.
-
- 8.8 Edit Two Files (Split Screen)
-
- This option allows you to create and edit any two files. Use
- Function Key 10 (F10) to switch windows. At this time you
- cannot transfer text between windows.
-
- 8.9 Edit Configuration file
-
- This option allows you to edit the Configuration File (LAN-
- LINK.SYS).
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 46
-
-
- 8.10 Edit LAN-LINK.001 through LAN-LINK.010 files
-
- This option allows you to create and edit the 10 files (LAN-
- LINK.001 to LAN-LINK.010). Use the suffix number to access
- the respective LAN-LINK.* file, use the number 0 to access
- the LAN-LINK.010 file .
-
- 8.11 Pick Capture-to-disk to Edit
-
- This option presents you with a directory window containing
- a list of capture-to-disk files (YYMMDD.RUN). Move the
- cursor down to the desired file and touch the 'Enter' key.
- If you don't want to edit any of them, then move the cursor
- down to a blank line. If you have more files than one screen
- full, use the Pgdn (Page Down) key to show the next screen
- full.
-
- 8.12 Pick Message file to Edit
-
- This option presents you with a directory window containing
- a list of message files (*.OUT). Move the cursor down to the
- desired message file and touch the 'Enter' key. If you don't
- want to edit any of them, then move the cursor down to a
- blank line. If you have more files than one screen full, use
- the Pgdn (Page Down) key to show the next screen full.
-
- 8.13 Leave Messages on your local BBS
-
- This option allows you to edit your LOCAL-BBS.BBS file in a
- single window.
-
- 9.0 Event/Clock Menu
-
- LAN-LINK contains some time dependent features which allow you to
- schedule events. These features are controlled from this menu and
- are listed below.
-
- A Set Alarm
- C Connect/Call
- D Display Event
- P Periodic Event
- R Turn Robot ON/OFF
- S Turn ConteSt ON/OFF
- T Turn Time Display ON/OFF
- X Cancel Event
- Z Zap BBS
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- To set a scheduled event, first select the event, then enter the
- time. You may set the event to occur once a day, or once an hour.
- If you wish the event to occur once an hour, enter an hour value
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 47
-
-
- greater than 23 when asked to enter the hour. Each time the event
- occurs, the feature will be cleared.
-
- 9.1 Set Alarm
-
- This option allows you to set an alarm clock.
-
- 9.2 Connect
-
- This option allows you to set LAN-LINK to issue a call or
- connect request at some later time.
-
- 9.3 Display Event
-
- This option allows you to display the scheduled event.
-
- 9.4 Periodic Event
-
- This option allows you to set a periodic connect request or
- call event. You can set the start time, the end time and the
- time interval between the connect/call attempts. The first
- connect that goes through will clear the event scheduler.
-
- 9.5 Turn Robot ON/OFF
-
- This option allows you to turn the AMTOR/Packet Robot on or
- off at a fixed time.
-
- 9.6 Turn Contest ON/OFF
-
- This option allows you to turn the AMTOR/Packet Automatic
- Contester on or off at a fixed time. You will be prompted
- for the time, a starting QSO number (in case you a
- restarting the contest) and the Contest Text (in case you
- wish to change it).
-
- 9.7 Turn Time Display ON/OFF
-
- This option allows you to turn the clock display on or off.
-
- 9.8 Cancel Event
-
- This option allows you to cancel a scheduled event.
-
- 9.9 Zap BBS
-
- This option allows you to schedule a BBS Zap at a
- predetermined time (like in the middle of the night). You
- may for example set it to attempt to connect to a BBS at a
- fixed time or hourly at any desired minute after the hour.
- Should the connect be made, the event scheduler will be
- cleared and no further connect attempts will be made.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 48
-
-
-
- 10.0 Files Menu
-
- The Files Menu provides the following choices.
-
- B Send Brag Tape
- D File Directory
- E Erase File
- P Pick Ctdsk File to View
- R Rename File
- S Send File
- T Send/Talk File
- U Send Uppercase File
- V View file
- Y View Ctdsk File
- Z View Messages
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- During the file transfer, the outgoing text will appear in the
- OUTwindow. If the text is long enough and fills the TNC buffer,
- you will see it stop, and then continue when the TNC is ready to
- accept more text, the message sequence will resume. NOTE hardware
- flow control NOT ^S/^Q software is used.
-
- When you transmit a file (B or S) you are returned to the receive
- mode after the file is sent except in the Packet Communications
- Mode. In the Packet Communications Mode, when the file has been
- loaded into the TNC the computer will add the ^Z character to the
- outgoing text to signal to the recipient that the file transmis-
- sion is over.
-
- The computer will signal you (using the bell character) when the
- file has been loaded into the TNC, Note that is not the same as
- the time that the TNC has transmitted the file, because the TNC
- incorporates a character buffer.
-
- 10.1 Send Brag Tape
-
- This command allows you to transmit a standard text file
- historically known as a "Brag Tape". The default name of the
- brag tape file is LAN-LINK.TXT, and it should be created
- with a word processor in the non-document mode.
-
- 10.2 File Directory
-
- This command shows you the directory of the disk drive.
-
- 10.3 Erase File
-
- This command allows you to erase or delete a file.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 49
-
-
- 10.4 Pick Ctdsk file to View
-
- This command allows you to view a *.RUN file. When you
- exercise this command you will be presented with a list of
- capture-to-disk files (YYMMDD.RUN). Move the cursor down to
- the one you want to view and touch the 'Enter' key to select
- it. Use this option, if you must, on long files. On files
- with less than 64k characters, use the Edit Menu.
-
- 10.5 Rename File
-
- This command allows you to rename a file. You could for
- example rename a document file to a "<callsign>.OUT" file so
- that someone will receive it automatically next time they
- connect.
-
- 10.6 Send File
-
- This option lets you transmit an ASCII file. In the non
- packet modes, it will turn the transmitter off after sending
- the file. In the packet mode it will send a ^Z character
- when the file is complete.
-
- 10.7 Send/Talk File
-
- This option lets you transmit an ASCII file. In the non
- packet modes, it will leave the transmitter on after sending
- the file.
-
- 10.8 Send Uppercase File
-
- This option lets you transmit an ASCII file and converts
- each line of text in the file to UPPERCASE before
- transmitting it. The file itself is not changed. In the non
- packet modes, it will turn the transmitter off after sending
- the file.
-
- 10.9 View file
-
- This option lets you view the contents of a file. Use it if
- you must on long files. On files with less than 64k
- characters, use the Edit Menu.
-
- 10.10 View Ctdsk File
-
- This option lets you view the contents of the capture-to-
- disk file (YYMMDD.RUN) which you specify by name. Use it if
- you must, on long files. On files with less than 64k
- characters, use the Edit Menu.
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 50
-
-
- 10.11 View Incoming Message File
-
- This option lets you view the contents the Incoming message
- file (yourcall.OUT). Use it if you must, on long files. On
- files with less than 64k characters, use the Edit Menu.
-
- 11.0 Help with function keys
-
- This option will activate the HELP display which presents you
- with a (very) brief reminder summary of the function and hot
- keys. This window will remain on display until a character is
- typed at the keyboard.
-
- 12.0 Jump to DOS Shell
-
- This option allows you to enter a DOS shell. If you do not
- restore the system to the directory which contains LAN-LINK
- before you EXIT from the shell, LAN-LINK will do so for you.
-
- You may use the DOS shell while in QSO when you have loaded the
- computer/TNC output buffers and output will continue to flow.
-
- To exit from the DOS shell back to LAN-LINK, enter the command
- 'EXIT'. LAN-LINK will automatically return you to the correct
- subdirectory.
-
- 13.0 LAN-LINK Menu
-
- The LAN-LINK menu provides different options depending on whether
- you are connected to another station or not. The following
- options are available when connected.
-
- B :QBU: External Protocols
- D :QZD: Download Binary File Using Zmodem
- M :QBM: ASCII File
- P :QSP: Message
- Q :QDB: ASCII File
- S :QSM: Message
- T :QTA: Messages
- U :QRU: Messages
- Z :QZU: Upload Binary File Using Zmodem
-
- The following option is available when not connected.
-
- W Who is "ON-LINE"
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- Each of the features (except the :QBU:) may also be performed
- manually by typing the full sequence of Network Control Language
- (see Appendix 3) character strings.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 51
-
-
- 13.1 The :QBU: Command
-
- This is a Sequence for external operations. It requires that
- the batch file 'QBU-TX.BAT' be present in the transmitting
- (initiating) station, and the batch file 'QBU-RX.BAT' be
- present in the receiving station. When the QBU sequence is
- executed the following occurs:-
-
- The transmitting station sends a :QBU:
-
- The receiving station sends a :QRV: and an amount of memory
- left on disk, enters the transparent mode, jumps to dos and
- executes the batch file 'QBU-RX.BAT'.
-
- Upon receipt of the :QRV:, the transmitting station then
- puts the TNC in the transparent mode and jumps to Dos and
- executes the batch file 'QBU-TX.BAT'. The batch file should
- exit and return to LAN-LINK. LAN-LINK then exits the trans
- parent mode.
-
- When the receiving station batch file finishes and returns
- to LAN-LINK. LAN-LINK then exits the transparent mode and
- transmits a :QSL: if the DOS Error level was 0 and a :QNO:
- error if it wasn't.
-
- At this time both stations are back in the converse mode.
-
- You may use this technique for transmitting pure binary
- files using external (to LAN-LINK) protocols). You may
- change the default names of the batch files in the LAN-
- LINK.SYS configuration file.
-
- 13.2 :QBM: ASCII File
-
- You use this option to download an ASCII file from another
- LAN-LINK station. It is the same as manually typing
- ':QBM: FILENAME'.
-
- 13.3 :QSM: Message
-
- You use this option to request a repeat of a message. It is
- the same as manually typing ':QSM:'.
-
- 13.4 :QSP: Message
-
- You use this option to store a message on another LAN-LINK
- station. It is the same as manually typing
- ':QSP: <callsign>'.
-
- LAN-LINK contains store and forward routines for messages in
- a Local Area Network (LAN) as described in Appendix 2.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 52
-
-
- When connected to another LAN-LINK station, you may use the
- NC/L :QSP: command to leave a message at that station. This
- QSP command automates that feature for you. It lets you just
- enter the callsign of the station you wish to leave a
- message for. It will then send the text sequence :QSP:
- <callsign>. The other LAN-LINK HOST station will either
- reply :QNO: followed by a number or :QRV: <callsign>. The
- 'QNO' message means that the other computer cannot accept
- the message, the :QRV: message means that it is waiting for
- you to send it.
-
- If you get the :QRV: reply, go ahead and type the message,
- or send the text file containing the message. If you type
- the message, use a control Z (^Z) character and carriage
- return to terminate the message. (In AMTOR, LAN-LINK will
- translate the ^Z to :EOF: +? to terminate the message). You
- will then receive either a :QSL: from the other station
- meaning that the message is accepted, or a :QNO: followed by
- a message that something went wrong and the message was not
- stored.
-
- 13.5 :QDB: ASCII File
-
- You use this option to upload an ASCII file to another LAN-
- LINK station. It is the same as manually typing
- ':QDB: FILENAME'.
-
- Using this option saves you typing the file name twice.
-
- 13.6 :QRU: Messages
-
- The NC/L QRU command allows you to upload a number of
- messages to the other station. You use it when you have
- messages pending on your system and want to pass them to a
- third computer for storage in the LAN, while you take your
- computer off-line.
-
- You use this option to begin the upload sequence to transfer
- messages for a number of stations to another LAN- LINK
- station. It is the same as manually typing :QRU:.
-
- You can only use this option with a station which you have
- previously designated as a store and forward mail box, for
- specific stations, namely one for which you have set up a
- <callsign>.MBX file. This command may be triggered by you
- using this choice or by the connecting station sending you a
- :QRU: command.
-
- When the sequence is over, the computer sending the messages
- will transmit the NC/L command word :QJG: to signal that the
- sequence is complete. Should you receive it before you get
- any messages, then there weren't any pending.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 53
-
-
-
- If you want to download messages from another LAN-LINK
- system, connect to it and type the sequence :QRU: followed
- by the 'Enter' character. that system will then respond to
- you as if the operator there had initiated a QRU command.
-
- Appendix 2 contains more information on the LAN capabilities
- of LAN-LINK.
-
- 13.7 Who is "ON-LINE"
-
- You use this option (when unconnected and monitoring the
- traffic on a channel) to see who is 'ON-LINE' on the LAN. It
- is the same as going manually into the Converse Mode and
- transmitting an unconnected packet containing the character
- string :QRA:.
-
- 13.8 :QTA: Messages
-
- If you have a bad path (See Section 24.12) and your messages
- are not automatically deleted by the other station after
- they have been sent to you, you use this option to delete
- your message. It is the same as manually typing ':QTA:'.
-
- 13.9 :QZD: Binary Files
-
- This command uses the external batch files to download a
- Binary file from another LAN-LINK Station using the Zmodem
- Protocol. See Appendix 2.5 for further information about
- LAN-LINK's binary file transfer capability. If you attempt
- to download a file which exists in your computer, LAN-LINK
- will use ZModem's "restore after interrupt" capability to
- pick up the transfer at the point when (it assumes) the
- transfer was interrupted. You must configure all four
- QZ*.BAT files before trying to :QZD: as described in Section
- 24.13.
-
- 13.10 :QZU: Binary Files
-
- This command uses the external batch files to Upload a
- Binary file to another LAN-LINK Station using the Zmodem
- Protocol. See Appendix 2.5 for further information about
- LAN-LINK's binary file transfer capability. LAN-LINK will
- not let you upload a file to the other system, if a file
- with that name already exists on the system. This stops you
- overwriting existing files. If the link drops out while you
- are uplinking a file, and you wish to try again later,
- rename the file you are sending, then reconnect and try
- again. Don't forget to :QSP: the other station and tell the
- operator what happened. You must configure all four QZ*.BAT
- files before trying to :QZU: as described in Section 24.13.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 54
-
-
- 14.0 Log Menu
-
- LAN-LINK performs automatic logbook entries for Packet and AMTOR
- Beacon mode Connects, and semiautomatic logbook entries for other
- modes. The Log files are in dBASE 3 format and can be processed
- by the DBASE Logbook Package in PC-HAM for indexed listings,
- tracking of DXCC and other AWARDS, etc. This is ideal for special
- event stations and DX-peditions, for the whole QSL process and
- further statistical analyses of their operation. The structure of
- the logbook files are as shown below.
-
- Field Field Name Type Length
- 1 DATE Character 8
- 2 TIME Character 4
- 3 BAND Character 3
- 4 CALL Character 10
- 5 RX Character 3
- 6 TX Character 3
- 7 MODE Character 4
- 8 POWER Character 4
- 9 QSLSENT Character 1
- 10 QSLRX Character 1
- 11 COMMENTS Character 20
- -------------------------------
- ** Total ** 62
-
- The size of the COMMENTS field is a compromise. Each field is a
- fixed size so that each log entry takes up a minimum of 62
- characters worth of space on the disk even if all the character
- space is unused. You may change the size of the field if you
- wish, but to do that you will have to use dBASE. Note also, that
- if you do make the comments field longer, the display will be
- screwed up.
-
- For the logging feature to work, the logbook file VHF.DBF (or
- HF.DBF) must be present on the disk.
-
- When an AMTOR beacon mode or packet connect occurs, the connect
- is automatically logged. In the Packet Mode, the connect path is
- placed in the comments section of the logbook entry. In the non
- packet modes, the log data entry is set up for you with default
- 599 values for the reports exchanged.
-
- When you bring up the Log Menu you will be shown the last screen
- or page of log entries. The last entry will be highlighted. At
- this time a number of function keys can be used, or you may
- depress the 'Escape' key to bring up the Main Log Menu. The
- following are the Function Keys are active in the Log Menu.
-
- Alt-A Append Entry
- Alt-E Edit Log Entry
- Alt-F Find an Entry
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 55
-
-
- Alt-S Scan Log by Call
- Alt-U Toggle Delete Mark
- Alt-Z Pack Log
- Ins Toggle Insert Mode
- End Show Last Page
- Home Show First Page
- PgUp Move Up One Page
- PgDn Move Down One Page
- Up Arrow Move Up One Entry
- Down Arrow Move Down One Entry
-
- The operation of each function key is described below.
-
- 14.0.1 Alt-A Append Entry
-
- This function key allows you to manually append an entry to
- the log. You can also use this command to enter the odd SSB
- contact into the logbook file. If you do, use the characters
- 'SSB' or 'FM' for those voice modes to remain compatible
- with the rest of the DBASE logbook package.
-
- When appending or editing an entry, LAN-LINK will
- automatically enter the date, time, callsign of the other
- station, band, mode and QSL information in upper case.
-
- The comments field in the LAN-LINK logbook file is
- restricted to a maximum of 20 characters. If you try and
- enter more than 20, the surplus will be ignored.
-
- 14.0.2 Alt-E Edit Log Entry
-
- This function key allows you to edit the highlighted entry.
- Move the cursor with the arrow keys, and end the edit
- process by depressing the 'Escape' key.
-
- You may use the 'QSL' entry to tag the fact that you have
- written out or received a QSL card.
-
- 14.0.3 Alt-F Find an Entry
-
- This function key allows you to find an entry by the
- (record) number assigned to it by LAN-LINK. This is the
- number displayed in the first column.
-
- 14.0.4 Alt-S Scan Log by Call
-
- This function key allows you to scan the logbook by callsign
- prefix.
-
- 14.0.5 Alt-U Toggle Delete Mark
-
- This function key allows you to mark an entry for deletion,
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 56
-
-
- or un-mark it in case you change your mind. Entries marked
- for deletion will be flagged by an '*' character next to the
- record number.
-
- 14.0.6 Alt-Z Pack Log
-
- This function key allows you to pack the logbook files. All
- entries marked for deletion will really be deleted at this
- time.
-
- 14.0.7 Ins Toggle Insert Mode
-
- This function key allows you to turn the insert mode ON and
- OFF for the edit/append functions.
-
- 14.0.8 End Show Last Page
-
- This function key moves you to the last page of the logbook.
-
- 14.0.9 Home Show First Page
-
- This function key moves you to the first page of the
- logbook.
-
- 14.0.10 PgUp Move Up One Page
-
- This function key moves the display up one page of the
- logbook.
-
- 14.0.11 PgDn Move Down One Page
-
- This function key moves the display down one page of the
- logbook.
-
- 14.0.12 Up Arrow Move Up One Entry
-
- This function key moves the highlight up one entry in the
- logbook.
-
- 14.0.13 Down Arrow Move Down One Entry
-
- This function key moves the highlight down one entry in the
- logbook.
-
- When you bring up the Main Log Menu, it provides the
- following choices.
-
- A Append Entry
- B Scan Log by Band
- C Change Log
- D find Date
- E Edit Log Entry
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 57
-
-
- F Find an Entry
- I Import-Convert Log
- H Help Function Keys
- K Pick Log file
- M Scan Log by Mode
- N Create New Log File
- P Print Log File
- S Scan Log by Call
- U Update from Old data
- X eXit From Log Menu
- Z fuZzy scan
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- 14.1 Append an Entry
-
- This option lets you append an entry. It is the same as the
- Alt-A logbook mode function key.
-
- 14.2 Scan Log by Band
-
- This option lets you scan the logbook file and display QSOs
- made on a particular band.
-
- 14.3 Change Logbook File
-
- This option lets you temporarily change the logbook file. If
- you want to change it permanently, change it in the LAN-
- LINK.SYS file. When you enter the new name, LAN-LINK will
- assume that it is a filetype DBF. For example, if you have
- different logbooks for different operations on-line, such as
- 4X.DBF or W8.DBF, you only need answer 4X in response to the
- question to change to the 4X.DBF logbook. In accordance with
- the dBASE convention, you cannot use any filetype other than
- DBF.
-
- 14.4 Find Date
-
- This option lets you locate and move the highlight to
- entries for a particular date. If no entries are found for
- the desired date, the first entry after that date will be
- highlighted. Note you can also scan for parts of a date such
- as "90/01" for the first entry in January 1990.
-
- 14. 5 Edit Log Entry
-
- You invoke this option to edit the highlighted entry. This
- function is the same as that invoked with the Alt-E function
- key.
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 58
-
-
- 14.6 Find an Entry
-
- This option lets you find an entry by its number. It is the
- same as the Alt-F logbook mode function key.
-
- 14.7 Import-Convert Log
-
- This option lets you import logs from earlier releases of
- LAN-LINK (up to and including Version 1.56). It can also be
- used to import a log generated by the PC-HAM CONTEST
- program.
-
- 14.8 Help Function Keys
-
- This option brings up a menu listing the log mode function
- keys.
-
- 14.9 Scan Log by Mode
-
- This option lets you scan the logbook file and display QSOs
- made using a particular mode.
-
- 14.10 Print Log
-
- This command prints the contents of the logbook file in a
- formatted manner to the printer.
-
- 14.11 Scan Log by Call
-
- This command displays the contents of the logbook file in a
- formatted manner on the screen. It requests the callsign of
- the log entry to be displayed. If you want to see entries
- for particular calls or parts of call, enter those call or
- parts of calls. Valid entries are G, G3, G3Z etc. If you
- want to see every entry in the log, don't use this command,
- use the Page Up and Page Down keys from the Main Log menu.
-
- 14.12 Update from Old data
-
- This option is identical to the Append option except that
- the date and time are not entered for you automatically.
- You'd use this option to manually enter old data into the
- logbook.
-
- 14.13 Exit From Log Menu
-
- This option lets you exit from the Log Menu. It provides the
- same function as the Alt-X key.
-
- 14.14 Fuzzy Scan
-
- This option allows you to scan the callsign or the comment
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 59
-
-
- field (your choice) for a character string. For example you
- could scan the comments field for all entries with the word
- "Joe". You could scan the callsigns for all calls with the
- suffix of "ZCZ".
-
- 14.15 Pick a Log file
-
- This command allows you to pick a *.DBF file. When you
- exercise this command you will be presented with a list of
- log files (*.DBF. Move the cursor down to the one you want
- to use and touch the 'Enter' key to select it.
-
- 14.16 Create a New Log file
-
- This command allows you to create a blank logbook (*.DBF)
- file.
-
- 15.0 Message Menu
-
- The Message Menu provides the following choices.
-
- B BBS Command Files
- C Current Messages
- N leave Note
- O Old Messages
- T Time tag
- V View Message
-
- Type the single letter to make your choice.
-
- 15.1 BBS Command Files
-
- This option shows you a list of the BBS command files on the
- default directory. In other words, all files with the file
- extension of '.BBS'.
-
- 15.2 Current Messages
-
- This option shows you a list of the outgoing messages that
- have not been sent. In other words, all files with the file
- extension of '.OUT'.
-
- 15.3 View Message
-
- This feature allows you to view messages in the computer.
- After depressing the key you will be prompted for INcoming
- or OUTgoing (I/O) messages. If you request 'I' (Incoming)
- messages you will see the messages addressed to your
- callsign. If you request 'O' (for OUTgoing) you will be
- presented with a directory window containing a list of
- messages. Move the cursor down to the desired message, and
- touch the 'Enter' key. If you don't want to view any of
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 60
-
-
- them, then move the cursor down to a blank line. If you have
- more messages than one screen full, use the Pgdn (Page Down)
- key to show the next screen full.
-
- 15.4 Leave Note
-
- This feature allows you to leave a note for another station
- on the LAN in your system. It works in the manner described
- in Section 8.
-
- 15.5 Old Messages
-
- This feature shows you a list of the messages that have been
- sent. In other words, all files with the file extension of
- '.OLD'.
-
- 15.6 Time Tag
-
- This option is used to place a date time header on a message
- file previously prepared by a word processor. The name of
- the file must be in the format 'CALLSIGN.OUT' (For example,
- G3ZCZ.OUT). It requests the callsign of the message file. It
- then opens a new file, writes the header to the new file and
- copies the contents of the original '*.OUT' file to the new
- one. When all is done, the original filename is changed to
- '*.BAK' and the new one becomes '*.OUT'.
-
- 16.0 TNC Menu
-
- The TNC Menu provides the following choices.
-
- D Set TNC Date/Time
- F Flush TNC Buffer
- I Initialize TNC
- M calls Monitored List
- Q Change CQ Text
- S Show Connect Status
- T Change CTEXT
- X Activate TNC Mailbox
- Y Deactivate TNC Mailbox
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- 16.1 Set TNC Date/Time
-
- This feature puts the TNC into the Command Mode and loads
- the date into it from the computer time of day clock.
-
- This command does not work on the TNC1.
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 61
-
-
- 16.2 Flush TNC Buffer
-
- This option is used to flush the program's incoming or
- outgoing text buffer and that of the PK-232. When used with
- other TNCs it will only flush contents (if any) of the
- buffers in the PC. If you flush the incoming buffer, you
- will only flush the buffer in the PC, thus any characters
- still in the TNC will still come through. If that happens,
- bring up the function and wait a while before activating it.
-
- 16.3 Initialize TNC
-
- This feature sets up the defaults for the TNC from the file
- LAN-LINK.SYS. If you have put batteries in the TNC, you
- should normally only have to run this command when you first
- power up the TNC or change the batteries. However, the
- batteries must be removed initially since they are there to
- retain the default settings of the TNC (particularly the PK-
- 232). Once the initialization is complete, you can replace
- the batteries but leave the TNC on since the battery
- provides power to the RAMs after the TNC power is turned
- off.
-
- It will also set the date and time within the TNC from the
- computer clock, and, when it has loaded the configuration
- file, may prompt you to set the TNC Terminal mode. If you
- are using a TNC1 or a TNC2, it will not prompt you because
- it assumes that they only operate on VHF packet. If you are
- using a KPC-2, you may select 'H' or 'V', and of course, if
- you have a PK-232, you may choose any of the options.
-
- 16.4 Show Calls Monitored List
-
- This feature performs the same operation as Function Key 5
- (F5).
-
- 16.5 Show Connect Status
-
- When you are in the Packet Communications Mode, this command
- lets you see the state of the connection. It will show you
- if there are any unacknowledged packets en route to the
- other station. If you have been sending text, it is
- advisable to use this command before you disconnect, to
- ensure that all the data has been received and acknowledged
- by the other party. You may use this command in either the
- TNC Command or the TNC Converse Mode.
-
- In a multiconnect situation, it will show you the status on
- all the I/O channels.
-
- You may also use this command to reset the status window
- display after a relink or any other event which was not
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 62
-
-
- reflected in the status window.
-
- 16.6 Change CTEXT
-
- This feature allows you to temporarily change the message
- that will be received by another packet station when it
- connects to you. Refer to the 'CTEXT' command in the TNC
- manual.
-
- 16.7 Activate TNC Mailbox
-
- This option allows you to activate the personal mailbox
- built into your TNC. You use it to read your mail, or before
- shutting down, if you have not set the shut down mode to 5.
-
- You will have to interrogate the mailbox in the command mode
- (F) to view any messages. The mailbox in your TNC provides
- a convenient way for people to leave you a message when your
- PC is switched off or is in use for something other than
- packet radio. If you do choose to make use of the personal
- BBS in the mailbox, make sure that you have a battery in the
- TNC. When reading your TNC Mailbox mail, you must type the
- commands listed in your TNC manual.
-
- To save your local full service BBS SYSOP some hassles, it
- is strongly recommended that you let LAN-LINK do your
- outgoing and incoming message and bulletin store and
- forwarding. Use the 'L' option in the Edit menu to enter any
- messages off-line, the 'M' and 'K' options in the Edit menu
- to answer any incoming messages or comment on any bulletins.
- Once the data are in the LOCAL-BBS.BBS file, let the BBS Zap
- take care of transferring the messages to the BBS.
-
- 16.8 Deactivate TNC Mailbox
-
- This option allows you to deactivate the personal mailbox
- built into your TNC.
-
- 17.0 AMSAT-OSCAR Menu
-
- This menu allows you to configure the KAM, MFJ1278 or the PK-232
- to copy signals from AMSAT-OSCAR Spacecraft telemetry beacons.
- The following options are available.
-
- A UoSAT ASCII Beacon (PK-232 only)
- B Phase 3 RTTY Beacon
- C SAREX Menu (only if you are in the Packet
- Communications Mode)
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 63
-
-
- 17.1 UoSAT ASCII Beacon
-
- This option is only available on the PK-232. It configures
- the PK-232 for receiving UoSAT 1200 Baud ASCII signals in
- the following manner.
-
- ASCII
- AB 1200
- VHF ON (Bell 202 tones)
- RXR OFF
- TXR OFF
- WI ON (850 Hz shift)
-
- Signals from UoSAT-OSCAR 11 may be copied in this
- configuration. Note that although UoSAT-OSCAR 11 transmits
- Bell 202 compatible tones, the data sense is reversed. A
- hardware modification is required in the PK-232 to reverse
- the sense of the data at the modem output BEFORE it passes
- to the digital section of the unit.
-
- 17.2 Phase 3 RTTY Beacon
-
- This option configures the KAM, the MFJ1278 and the PK-232
- for receiving the AMSAT-OSCAR 10 and 13 RTTY telemetry
- beacons in the following manner.
-
- BAUDOT
- WI OFF (170 Hz shift) [ KAM : SH 170]
- TXR OFF
- RXR OFF
- RB 50 (50 baud)
- USOS OFF (Unshift on space off)
-
- 17.3 SAREX Menu
-
- This menu is only active in the Packet Communications Mode.
- It is designed for use with the Shuttle Amateur Radio
- Experiment (SAREX), MIR and the packet radio Microsats or
- any terrestrial station you want to connect with as soon as
- they appear on frequency. Apart from the Attack Mode, it can
- also be used as a diagnostic LAN tool for monitoring LAN
- traffic.
-
- 17.3.1 Attack Mode ON/OFF
-
- If the Attack Mode is set, this option will cause LAN-
- LINK to issue a connect request to the SAREX Call
- whenever a packet sent to or from it is heard. The mode
- is cleared when the connect is made (and does not retry
- out) or when the 'A' option is selected a second time,
- or when the Alert Call is cleared. If this mode is
- enabled, the Alert/SAREX Call prefix shown in the
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 64
-
-
- Status Window will indicate accordingly.
-
- A happy face will be displayed next to the '>' before
- the call once the connect has been achieved.
-
- Be careful using this feature, as it has the potential
- to cause a great deal of QRM. It can also be cleared by
- another station connecting to you and telling you to
- ':QRT:'. In the SAREX configuration you are listening
- on one channel while transmitting on an other. If this
- feature was used on a simplex channel (everyone
- transmits and listens on the same channel) aimed at a
- DX-pedition, there is a potential lockout mode, in
- which any one station sending a connect request to the
- desired/SAREX call will trigger the other ones on
- frequency who will in turn trigger the first. If this
- pile up situation occurs, I hope the DX-station will
- QSY and leave the automatic stations to do their thing.
- IN any event, if you use this feature and cause QRM,
- anyone can connect to you with the callsign of the DX
- station (as a pirate) and shut you down. You will then
- not get the coveted DX QSL.
-
- 17.3.2 Change SAREX Call
-
- This option lets you temporarily change the SAREX call.
-
- 17.3.3 SAREX Packets Capture to Disk ON/OFF
-
- This option allows you to configure LAN-LINK to capture
- to disk any packets addressed to or from the SAREX
- callsign. A [S] will be displayed in the status window
- when this option is active. The capture to disk file is
- opened by a packet header containing the SAREX call,
- and closed by another packet header not containing the
- call. When the file is open, the [S] will blink. Packet
- headers are considered to be lines with a '>' character
- in them. LAN-LINK thus considers both of the lines
- below as packet headers.
-
- N4QQ*>G3ZCZ
- N4QQ BBS>
-
- If you use this feature for monitoring BBS traffic, the
- BBS prompt lines ('E.G. N4QQ BBS>') will not be
- captured to disk. Do not get your SYSOP to remove the
- '>' from the prompt line, or the ZAP feature will then
- not work.
-
- A happy face will be displayed in the [S] after the
- SAREX call has been heard.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 65
-
-
- If you want to see an ORBITER menu, temporarily change
- the SAREX call to be the same as your call and bring up
- the AMSAT-OSCAR Menu.
-
- 17.3.4 Edit SAREX Capture-to-disk File
-
- This option lets you edit the SAREX Capture-to-disk
- file as long as it is less than 64 kBytes.
-
- 17.3.5 Zap SAREX On/Off
-
- This option combines the 'Set SAREX Attack Mode' and
- the 'SAREX Packets Capture to Disk ON/OFF' options in
- one fast operation.
-
- 17.4 SAREX Orbiter Features
-
- You need the SAREX ROBOT EPROM for this menu to actually do
- anything to the TNC. The EPROM may be available from The
- Radio Amateur Satellite Corporation (AMSAT) for DX-pedition
- use. Other options which control LAN-LINK parameters may be
- used without the SAREX ROBOT EPROM.
-
- In the Orbiter mode, LAN-LINK does not scan incoming text
- for the 'CONNECTED' and 'DISCONNECTED' messages when the
- SAREX Robot is active. This inhibits the bells and the
- capture-to-disk. It also means that the Robot must be OFF
- for any :Q: code uploads or downloads to occur.
-
- 17.4.1 Status Window Display
-
- A flashing '>>' appears in the status window when the SAREX
- robot is active. The SAREX Configuration boots up assuming
- that the SAREX Robot is active (Default).
-
- 17.4.2 Alt-O Function key.
-
- The Alt-O Function Key brings up the Orbiter menu. This is a
- faster route than the 'Esc O' sequence.
-
- 17.4.3 The Metabeacon
-
- The Metabeacon is loaded from the contents of one of the
- META.00n files. These files may be created by the LAN-LINK
- editor. When loading, LAN-LINK will insert a pass character
- (^V) into the text before a carriage return, so as not to
- end the packet before at least 240 characters, and not more
- than 255 characters have been output to the TNC. The maximum
- number of characters that can be loaded into the Metabeacon
- is 1776. The maximum number of packets in a Metabeacon is 7.
- You can also force a hard carriage return or 'end of packet'
- in the Metabeacon by inserting the '\' (backslash)
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 66
-
-
- character, which will not be transmitted, into the text.
-
- 17.4.4 SAREX Orbiter Menu
-
- The following commands are active in the Orbiter Menu.
-
- 17.4.4.1 Activates Beacons/SAREX Robot.
-
- This option activates the SAREX Robot and loads Meta
- Beacon. This command is designed for use when the SAREX
- is returned to the regular frequency.
-
- 17.4.4.2 Set QRZ/QSL Beacon Interval
-
- This command allows you to change the beacon timer. The
- default value is 120.
-
- 17.4.4.3 Set SAREX Call.
-
- This command allows you to change the SAREX call. Don't
- use this command on orbit (its for ground use only)
-
- 17.4.4.4 Turn SAREX ROBOT OFF
-
- The Robot must be turned On and Off this way to
- synchronize LAN-LINK to the TNC. When the Robot is
- turned OFF the following commands are sent to the TNC
- by LAN- LINK.
-
- USERS 1
- |A
- RO OFF
- CMSG OFF
- NO OFF
-
- 17.4.4.5 Set SAREX ROBOT Heard Count
-
- This command lets you set the Heard Count number.
-
- 17.4.4.6 Show I/O Status
-
- Shows who is on each stream, the SAREX Robot state, the
- number of USERS, the beacon timer value, the metabeacon
- timer value and the CTEXT.
-
- 17.4.4.7 ChecK Count
-
- Shows both heard and worked counts.
-
- 17.4.4.8 List Heard Calls
-
- Lists calls of the last few stations heard.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 67
-
-
-
- 17.4.4.9 Load Metabeacon
-
- This command loads the Metabeacon. You will be prompted
- for a text file number in the META.00n series. Enter a
- number 1-9 corresponding to META.001-META.009. The 0
- value is file META.010. Note the delays after loading
- the file to allow the TNC to stabilize.
-
- 17.4.4.10 Show Worked Calls
-
- Shows the last 35 or so calls worked.
-
- 17.4.4.11 Turn SAREX ROBOT ON
-
- The SAREX Robot must be turned On and Off via the menu.
- When the Robot is turned ON the following commands are
- sent to the TNC by LAN-LINK.
-
- USERS 9
- CONOK ON
- CMSG ON
- RO ON
- NO ON
-
- 17.4.4.12 Stop Metabeacon
-
- This command stops the Meta beacon. When activated, the
- contents of the beacon are dumped to the UNPROTO
- address (default SAREX) by the TNC, rather like a
- regular BBS dumping packets when a user disconnects
- abnormally.
-
- 17.4.4.13 Set Metabeacon Interval
-
- This command allows you to set the Meta Beacon timer.
- It will be loaded into the TNC the next time that the
- Meta Beacon is loaded. Even though loaded into the TNC
- immediately, it does not take effect till then.
-
- 17.4.4.14 Set SAREX ROBOT Worked Count
-
- Lets you set the number.
-
- 17.4.4.15 Set Connect TeXt
-
- This is the text (CTEXT) that will be transmitted to an
- incoming station when the ROBOT mode is off. This
- option lets you set up a new text string to go with the
- QSO number.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 68
-
-
- 17.4.4.16 Selects Silent Mode
-
- This command turns off the beacons, the SAREX Robot and
- also stops the Meta beacon. This command is designed to
- be used just before any prearranged packet activity.
-
- 17.4.4.17 Restart TNC
-
- This command RESTARTs the TNC, loads the date from the
- computer's clock and turns the 'EC OFF'. It seems to
- have no effect on the SAREX ROBOT and counters, but
- does kill the Meta beacon.
-
- 17.4.4.18 Capture QSL/QRZ Calls
-
- This command initiates the log-to-disk operation. It
- turns the capture-to-disk 'on' and sends the following
- commands to the TNC :- 'DA', 'SERW', 'SERH','MW',MH'.
- When the calls have stopped scrolling, use Function key
- 1 to turn the capture-to-disk off.
-
- 18.0 Parameter Menu
-
- The Parameter Menu provides the following choices.
-
- B Turn Beacon Mode ON/OFF 0 Change Band/Mode
- C Clear Connect Count 1 Change BBS Parameters
- D Turn Digipeat Detect ON/OFF 2 Change Callsigns
- E Turn Command Echo ON/OFF 3 Change Directories
- F Stay Connected after BBS Zap 4 Enter Common Calls
- I Turn Beacon ON/OFF 5 Change File Names
- K Change Keyboard Beep Count 6 Change LAN-LINK Parameters
- L Turn Ctdsk ON/OFF 7 Change PC Communications Params
- M Set Message Count 8 Change Colors
- N Turn NODE Drop Link ON/OFF 9 Change SAREX Parameters
- P Turn Printer ON/OFF U Update LAN-LINK.SYS
- Q Turn QTC Snatch ON/OFF V Verify Changes
- R Turn :QSP: Relay Flag ON/OFF W Change Scan Words
- S Turn Sound ON/OFF
- T Turn Contest Mode ON/OFF
- X Turn DCD Flag ON/OFF ! Zap BBS on Next Beacon
- Y Turn BBS Snatch ON/OFF + Turn Misc. Flag ON/OFF
- Z Turn Time Id. ON/OFF
-
- The colors used for the option letter differentiate between those
- options that are "remembered" in the SYS file and those that are
- only set temporarily for the session.
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 69
-
-
-
- 18.1 Turn Beacon Mode ON/OFF
-
- This command toggles the beacon option for the automatic CQ
- caller in the AMTOR and Packet Communications Modes. When it
- is active a [B] will be displayed in the status window. In
- this mode, the Automatic CQ sequence will resume after the
- AMTOR link is dropped or a Packet Communications Mode
- disconnect.
-
- In the Beacon Mode, the last few logbook entries will be
- displayed in the logpage window which overlays the outgoing
- text window at the bottom of the screen.
-
- In the Packet Mode, the CTEXT message is the only
- transmission from you that the other station will receive,
- so make it good and don't forget to set 'CMSG ON'.
-
- In the AMTOR Mailbox/Beacon Mode, the contents of the LAN-
- LINK.TXT file will be transmitted to the station who called
- you. The capture-to-disk will then be turned on to record
- one transmission from that station. The QSO will then be
- logged to the logbook file. Don't forget to check the
- entries in the LAN-LINK.LOG and text in the LAN-LINK.RUN
- files in case the computer made a mistake in recognizing the
- call sign of the other station.
-
- THE BEACON MODE IS DESIGNED TO ENCOURAGE PEOPLE TO QSY OFF
- THE CROWDED PACKET HF CHANNELS. DO NOT USE IT ON A CROWDED
- HF CHANNEL OR ON AN ACTIVE VHF CHANNEL. IF YOU DO, YOU WILL
- SOON FIND that OTHER STATIONS HAVE SET THEIR TNCS TO REJECT
- YOUR PACKETS, AND YOU WILL NOT WORK ANYBODY, YOU WILL JUST
- BE A SOURCE OF QRM AND WILL BE KNOWN AS SUCH.
-
- THE MODE IS ALSO DESIGNED FOR ROBOT BEACONS FOR THE HIGHER
- FREQUENCIES. FOR EXAMPLE IF YOU LEAVE IT RUNNING ON 6 OR 10
- METERS YOU NEVER KNOW WHEN A SHORT OPENING WILL ALLOW A QSO
- TO SOME PART OF THE WORLD, A DX CONTACT YOU WOULD HAVE
- OTHERWISE MISSED. DO NOT LEAVE IT RUNNING ON 20 METERS WHEN
- THE BAND IS OPEN. FURTHER APPLICATIONS ARE IN METEORSCATTER
- AND OTHER "EXOTIC" MODES OF COMMUNICATIONS.
-
- If you are using this Mode in a special event station or DX-
- pedition you may type characters into the transmit buffer,
- while the other station is sending to you. When he, she or
- even it turns it back to you, you will transmit those
- characters before the sign-off sequence.
-
- In both the Packet and AMTOR communications modes, the robot
- may be shut down by stations connecting to you and telling
- you to QRT.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 70
-
-
-
- 18.2 Clear Connect Count
-
- You use this option to reset the PACKET and AMTOR Beacon
- Mode "connect has taken place indicator" and QTC Snatch
- count. These are flashing [C] and [Q] displays in the status
- window. Whenever someone else connects or links up to you
- the [C] display will be incremented. The number shown with
- the 'C' is the number of connects that have taken place
- since the Indicator was last reset. If a 'happy face' is
- flashing along with the connect count, your "target station"
- was amongst those connecting. The [Q] indicator alerts you
- to the fact that LAN-LINK tried to connect to another
- station after recognizing your call in a mail beacon. Both
- are reset by this option. If you are monitoring Packet
- traffic on a channel, you may not notice that a connect has
- previously taken place. These indicators alert you to check
- the contents of the Incoming mail file ('yourcall.OUT') for
- any incoming messages.
-
- If the 'Q' count is much greater than the 'C' count you may
- be copying a beacon from a station that you cannot connect
- with directly.
-
- 18.3 Turn Digipeat Detect ON/OFF
-
- This option toggles the digipeat display command on and off.
- If the Digipeat Display is active, any signals digipeated
- through you will be stored to the LAN-LINK.RUN file and a
- 'beep' will be sounded for each packet being digipeated. The
- status display window will also contain a [D].
-
- 18.4 Turn Beacon Control ON/OFF
-
- This option toggles the LAN-LINK Handshake features. When
- they are on (default), the Connect handshake message
-
- [ZCZ] *** LAN-LINK 1.59>
-
- will be transmitted on incoming connects. The beacon text
- and time will be controlled by LAN-LINK as a function of the
- messages you have posted on your system. When they are off,
- LAN-LINK does not do anything to your beacon, nor does it
- transmit the handshake.
-
- 18.5 Turn Command Echo ON/OFF
-
- This option toggles the 'Command ECHO ON/OFF' flag. If the
- Command Echo flag is set, the commands and (contents of)
- files that LAN-LINK sends to the TNC will be displayed in
- the outgoing window. Set this flag to see how LAN-LINK
- commands the TNC in the different modes.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 71
-
-
-
- 18.6 Change Keyboard Beep Count
-
- LAN-LINK counts the number of characters entered on a line
- at the keyboard. When it gets to a preset value it will
- beep, signaling you to start a new line. This option changes
- the value that the keyboard beep counter is compared with to
- sound the audio signal.
-
- 18.7 Set Message Count
-
- As an alternative to Function Key 8 (F8) or Alt-D, using
- this option will also load a QTC 'Mail' list into your
- Packet Communications Mode Beacon and initiate a beacon
- transmission every 30 minutes (Refer to the BTEXT command in
- the TNC manual). If no messages are present, or the only
- message is to you (incoming or snatched), beacon
- transmissions are inhibited. This conforms to good operating
- practice on crowded Packet channels.
-
- 18.8 Turn NODE Drop Link ON/OFF
-
- When connecting via NET/ROM, the normal way of operating is
- to disconnect if the connect attempt fails. You may
- configure the NET/ROM connect attempt flag to stay connected
- at the node where the failure occurred. Use the normal mode
- when trying to get through on a known path, and the stay
- alive mode when exploring NET/ROM circuits.
-
- 18.9 Turn Printer ON/OFF
-
- This option toggles the printer on and off. When the printer
- is turned on, any incoming data will be printed in real
- time. If you intend to print files received at 1200 baud in
- the Packet Communications Mode, use a print spooler or you
- may lose data. The printer is automatically turned off in
- the Packet Mode when a disconnect occurs.
-
- 18.10 Turn QTC Snatch ON/OFF
-
- This option toggles the QTC Snatch flag on and off. If the
- QTC Snatch flag is enabled, LAN-LINK scans the contents of
- packets appearing in the Inwindow on the screen while the
- terminal is disconnected. Should it recognize the three text
- strings 'LAN-LINK', ':QTC:', and 'your callsign' in the
- contents of a packet, it will then issue a connect request
- to the callsign of the LAN-LINK station that originated the
- beacon transmission. If the connect is made, the other
- station will send you the message automatically which LAN-
- LINK will "capture to disk". The connect will time out and
- terminate a few minutes later.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 72
-
-
- The normal connect request will be made DIRECT to the
- station. If you expect messages from stations you can only
- connect with via a digipeater, place the path in your LAN-
- LINK.DIR directory file. It should be there anyhow if you
- connect to the station regularly. For example, if you expect
- messages from 4Z4ZB whom you can only work if digipeated via
- 4X1AA then place an entry like
-
- 4Z4ZB 4Z4ZB V 4X1AA
-
- in the LAN-LINK.DIR file.
-
- The QTC Snatch leaves your messages in a message file
- <yourcall>.OUT. It is triggered by the first > in the
- initial connect response of LAN-LINK 1.59R> (note the '>')
- and terminated by the 'over' at the end of the message ea.
- G3ZCZ/W8> (note the '>'). If you train stations not using
- LAN-LINK who want to leave you messages to trigger your QTC-
- Snatch, by transmitting the following unaddressed packet
-
- LAN-LINK :QTC: <yourcall>
-
- your system will connect to them. (For example to leave a
- message for me, they would send
-
- LAN-LINK :QTC: G3ZCZ
-
- as an unaddressed packet [in Converse Mode when not
- connected, or in their beacon text].)
-
- If they then send you a '>' on a line by itself, followed by
- the message itself, and terminated by another '>' as the
- last character of the line, the message will end up in a
- message file rather than in the LAN-LINK.RUN file and you
- can scan it fast using Alt-M (Message Scan Menu Options). It
- goes without saying that the message itself should not
- contain the '>' character. If it does, by the way, the first
- part of the message will be in the message file, while the
- remainder will be in the LAN-LINK.RUN file.
-
- 18.11 Turn :QSP: Relay Flag ON/OFF
-
- This option toggles the Store and forward Message Relay
- Capability of your system on and off. If the Message Relay
- Capability is active (toggled on), any one who connects can
- store a message in your system using the ':QSP: <callsign>'
- NC/L command. If the Message Relay Capability is not active
- anyone who attempts to ':QSP: a message' will receive a
- ':QNO: 1' "error" message. The status display window will
- show a [R] when the Message Relay Capability is active. The
- default state for the Message Relay Capability is loaded
- from the LAN-LINK.SYS file.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 73
-
-
-
- When the Store and forward capability is active, the suffix
- 'R' will be added to the
-
- '[ZCZ] *** LAN-LINK 1.59' ie., '[ZCZ] *** LAN-LINK 1.59R'
-
- message received by anyone connecting to your system to
- notify them that they can store messages. In this manner
- they don't have to try to leave a message and then get
- ':QNO:' error message to find out that the feature is
- toggled off.
-
- Remember, if you configure your computer to store and
- forward messages, you have a moral obligation to deliver
- them.
-
- 18.12 Turn Sound ON/OFF
-
- This option toggles the sound on and off. If the sound is
- off, a flashing indicator will be displayed in the Status
- Window. When the sound is toggled on again, a chime will
- sound to verify the audio.
-
- 18.13 Turn Contest Mode ON/OFF
-
- This option first toggles the Contest Mode. If the Contest
- Mode is active, the word 'TEST' and the number of the next
- QSO will be displayed in the status window. When the Contest
- Mode is toggled on, this command then prompts you to set the
- starting QSO number and the standard message that will be
- transmitted as part of the exchange of messages during a
- contest. The QSO number will be incremented each time you
- log a contact.
-
- There are two special character sequences that you can enter
- in the contest text string. If you enter a double '#' sign,
- as in '##', it will be replaced by the QSO number when the
- text is transmitted. You may also use '#1' to represent the
- callsign of the station being worked in the contest text
- string. For example, use the following entries for the
- following contests;
-
- '##1 UR ##A' ... in the Sweepstakes,
- '5905' ... in the WAZ,
- '59 MD' ... in the ARRL DX, and
- '59 ##' ... in the WPX.
-
- As an example, if I (W3/G3ZCZ) was in the Sweepstakes con
- test, and my Contest text line was,
-
- '##1 UR ##A W3/G3ZCZ 68 MDC'.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 74
-
-
- If the next QSO number is 345, and I am working KW3C, LAN-
- LINK would transmit the following line when I touch the
- 'End' key;
-
- 'KW3C UR 345A W3/G3ZCZ 68 MDC'.
-
- The contest feature is toggled off the next time you select
- this feature.
-
- Note that while this does give you some semiautomatic
- contest operation by using command keys, there is no
- checking of callsigns for duplicates built into the program.
- You may do that by using the Alt-S hot key.
-
- In a contest, you enter the callsigns and call the other
- station in the normal manner, then use the 'End' Key to
- transmit the exchange (QSO number and standard text). LAN-
- LINK will only transmit the contest text in this manner. If
- you want to add a 'K' or 'KN', you will need to put it in
- the contest text string. It is also advisable to use a
- different log file for each contest to cut down the search
- time. The contest QSO number increments each time you log
- the QSO (Alt-L).
-
- You may put the Contest Mode into automatic if you are
- operating AMTOR or packet. To do so, use the Alt-O function
- key.
-
- 18.14 Turn DCD Flag ON/OFF
-
- If you are using a KAM or a PK-232 then this flag should be
- set to ON. If you are using another TNC, if you can jumper
- the TNC so that pin 8 on the RS-232 interface changes state
- when connected, do so and set this flag to ON. If you can't,
- then set this flag to OFF. If this flag is OFF, the multiple
- connect modes will not work so don't attempt to invoke them.
- If this flag is OFF, the words '*** CONNECTED' and '***
- DISCONNECTED' when seen in the LAN may cause spurious
- apparent connects and disconnects in LAN-LINK.
-
- 18.15 Turn BBS Snatch ON/OFF
-
- If the BBS Mail Snatch is enabled, when a BBS sends a packet
- announcing 'Mail', if your callsign is in the first line of
- that message, LAN-LINK will issue a connect request (again
- via the path in LAN-LINK.DIR) to that BBS. When connected,
- it will act as if you have initiated a ZapBBS command. The
- Zap counter will be incremented each time a BBS Mail Snatch
- takes place.
-
- A typical KAM display which triggers a BBS Mail Snatch for
- any of the calls listed below follows.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 75
-
-
-
- N4QQ>MAIL/V [09/03/89 18:49:24]:
- LstMsg# 19428 Mail: N4FG KL7VZ WA6IEL N7DVA N9BE G3ZCZ
-
- Note if the BBS Mail beacon has an extra line in it (between
- the header and the list of calls) as follows, the BBS Mail
- snatch will not work.
-
- N4QQ>MAIL/V [09/03/89 18:49:24]:
- BBS Serving Silver Spring Md.
- LstMsg# 19428 Mail: N4FG KL7VZ WA6IEL N7DVA W4TNX G3ZCZ
-
- If a message is posted for any call containing the character
- string "N4FG" such as N4FGA, N4FG will respond to the mes
- sage. This gives rise to a lock out situation, because N4FG
- will respond to the beacon, go through the sequence de
- scribed in the Zapbbs section and disconnect. The beacon
- message will not be cleared because it was not read, so the
- next mail beacon from the BBS will contain the call N4FGA,
- and N4FG will once again respond to it.
-
- Should you be unlucky and happen to be in this situation,
- disable the BBS Snatch flag and set a Periodic Event to Zap
- your BBS sometime in the middle of the night. Alternatively,
- when you come into the shack and the BBS is in use, set the
- 'Zap BBS on Next Mail Beacon' parameter to ON (See Section
- 7.13).
-
- 18.16 Turn Time Id ON/OFF
-
- This option is only active in the PK-232. It allows you to
- determine if the callsign sequence transmitted using
- Function key 3 (F3) will contain a date/time stamp. If the
- Id is set ON a date/time stamp will be transmitted.
-
- 18.17 Turn Automatic Capture-to-Disk Flag ON/OFF
-
- This option allows you to turn the automatic capture-to-disk
- feature ON and OFF.
-
- 18.18 Change BBS Parameters
-
- This sub-menu allows you to change the BBS Parameters, as
- described in the following paragraphs.
-
- 18.18.1 Local BBS Callsign
-
- This option lets you change the call of the local BBS.
- This is the call that LAN-LINK will show in the prompt
- for the 'Zap' command.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 76
-
-
- 18.18.2 Mail-Snatch Trigger Word
-
- You can set the Mail-Snatch Trigger in the BBS Mail
- beacon. Most BBS's use word 'Mail' and a string of
- calls to indicate the presence of messages. If your BBS
- uses something else, you may customize LAN-LINK on this
- line to tell it what word your BBS uses.
-
- Note that if your BBS uses 'QTC' you may end up calling
- yourself if you disconnect while traffic is flowing on
- the LAN.
-
- 18.18.3 Read Request Command
-
- This is the command LAN-LINK issues to the BBS during a
- Zap sequence to request your mail. The default value is
- RM for Read Mine. On a WA7MBL BBS you may change it to
- VM for a Verbose Read of the full packet headers. On a
- W0RLI BBS you may change it to RN to only request new
- messages. If you do change it, use the 'V' option in
- the Parameters Menu to make sure it is correct. If it
- isn't correct, the Zap BBS feature will not work.
-
- 18.18.4 Read Bulletin Request Command
-
- This is the command LAN-LINK issues to the BBS during a
- Zap sequence to read bulletins identified by the scan
- words. The default value is R for Read. On a WA7MBL BBS
- you may change it to V for a Verbose Read of the full
- packet headers. On a W0RLI BBS you may change it to RH.
-
- 18.19 Change Callsigns
-
- This sub-menu allows you to change the Callsign and AMTOR
- SELCAL, as described in the following paragraphs.
-
- 18.19.1 Callsign
-
- The default callsign is G8BTB. Please do not use G8BTB.
- Replace G8BTB with yours. You may use / characters if
- you wish. This is the call sign that will be used in
- the non packet modes. You may thus use "portable
- designators" such as G3ZCZ/A, G3ZCZ/W3, W3/G3ZCZ or
- G3ZCZ/4X, which you cannot do in Packet.
-
- This is the call that will be monitored for in the
- Digipeat Monitoring Mode. In this Mode, which is
- toggled on and off by the selection of the D Option
- included in the Parameter Menu (PK-232 only), if
- someone uses you as a digipeater while you are not
- connected to anyone else, the event will be logged to
- disk. This Mode will only work if your callsign as
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 77
-
-
- stored in this line is a valid (uppercase only) packet
- callsign.
-
- For example, in the PK-232, if the callsign is G3ZCZ
- then the sequence >G3ZCZ> will be recognized as a
- digipeat and the event logged. Thus 4X6AA*>G3ZCZ>4Z4ZB
- would be logged as a digipeat event.
-
- Store your callsign using UPPERCASE characters if you
- want the DIGIPEAT DETECT option to work (EA. G3ZCZ). If
- you use lower case (ea. g3zcz), recognition will never
- take place. The TNC automatically converts case to
- upper case in the non packet communications modes.
-
- If you are using an SSID (e.g. G3ZCZ-8) in the Packet
- Communications Mode, you should enter the whole call
- INCLUDING the SSID.
-
- 18.19.2 The SELCAL
-
- This is your AMTOR SELCAL. LAN-LINK will try to guess
- it and prompt you with a SELCAL configured for your
- callsign. If you want a different one, overwrite the
- prompted version.
-
- If you are not using a PK-232 or KAM or the MFJ1278,
- the SELCAL must still be in the Configuration file.
-
- 18.19.3 The PacketCluster Call
-
- This option allows you to change the PacketCluster Call
- without connecting to it.
-
- 18.20 Change Directories
-
- This sub-menu allows you to change the Directories used by
- LAN-LINK, as described in the following paragraph.
-
- 18.20.1 QBM Download Directory
-
- This is the directory the :QBM: command will search to
- find a file to be downloaded. The default value is
- \LAN-LINK\FILES\. Set them up using DOS. If you are
- using a hard disk, put LAN-LINK in a LAN-LINK
- subdirectory. Note: that last '\' MUST be present.
-
- 18.21 Enter Common Calls
-
- Each time you call another station, LAN-LINK remembers it
- (up to the last 16). When you update the SYS file, these
- calls that you use most commonly will be saved to disk. You
- can use this option to add calls, delete calls or edit calls
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 78
-
-
- in the list. Use the 'Delete' key to delete a call.
-
- 18.22 Change File Names
-
- This sub-menu allows you to change the default file names
- used by LAN-LINK, as described in the following paragraphs.
-
- 18.22.1 VHF Logbook File (VHF.DBF)
-
- This is the name of the file to be used as your VHF
- Packet logbook.
-
- 18.22.2 HF Logbook File (HF.DBF)
-
- This is the name of the file to be used as your HF
- logbook. It is used for all modes, including HF packet.
-
- 18.22.3 Path Directory File (LAN-LINK.DIR)
-
- This is the name of the file used as your call
- directory.
-
- 18.22.4 Brag Tape (LAN-LINK.TXT)
-
- This is the name of the file used as your brag tape.
-
- 18.22.5 QBU Upload File Name (QBU-TX.BAT)
-
- This is the name of the batch file used to initiate a
- QBU.
-
- 18.22.6 QBU Download File Name (QBU-RX.BAT)
-
- This is the name of the batch file used when a :QBU:
- command is received from a remote station.
-
- 18.23 Change LAN-LINK Parameters
-
- This sub-menu allows you to change the LAN-LINK Parameters,
- as described in the following paragraphs.
-
-
- 18.23.1 Change CQ Text
-
- This feature allows you to change the contents of the
- CQ text message string. This is the message string that
- is transmitted along with the CQ call. Think of this
- message as a CQTEXT line.
-
- 18.23.2 Set the Default Band
-
- The default value is 2 for 2 Meters. Use the Meter
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 79
-
-
- value for the band to keep the display correct. It is
- displayed in the status window. If you normally operate
- on another band change the default value to reflect
- your usual default state.
-
- 18.23.3 Set the Default Transmitter Power
-
- The default value is 10 for 10 watts. It is displayed
- in the status window. If your transmitter uses a
- different power level change the default value to
- reflect your usual default state.
-
- 18.23.4 Set CQ delay time Seconds
-
- This option allows you to change the time (seconds)
- that the LAN-LINK waits for a response after a CQ call
- until the following one is transmitted. The default
- value (in minutes and seconds) is loaded from the LAN-
- LINK.SYS file.
-
- 18.23.5 Set CQ delay time Minutes
-
- This option allows you to change the time (minutes)
- that the LAN-LINK waits for a response after a CQ call
- until the following one is transmitted. The default
- value (in minutes and seconds) is loaded from the LAN-
- LINK.SYS file.
-
- 18.23.6 Set Number of lines in a Non Contest CQ Call
-
- This option allows you to change the number of lines in
- a CQ call from the default value of 3 to any number you
- wish. Note that in the contest mode, this option has no
- effect. This parameter is not remembered when LAN- LINK
- is terminated, so if you want to use a value other than
- 3, you will have to set it each time you operate this
- program.
-
- 18.23.7 Set Shut Down Mode (QRT Flag)
-
- This option allows you to customize the shut down
- sequence of the TNC. You have the choice of QRT, QRV
- and QRV + CTEXT Toggle as described in the following
- sections.
-
- 18.23.7.1 QRT
-
- Turns the TNC into a VHF Digipeater and turns
- CONOK OFF (CFROM NONE for the PK-232). In this
- condition the TNC will reject connect requests.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 80
-
-
- 18.23.7.2 QRV
-
- Allows you to stay alive on turnoff. It will send
- MON OFF (MON 0 for the PK-232) to the TNC at
- shutdown without touching CONOK/CFROM {PK-232},
- and at turn on. You will then have to initialize
- the terminal and Communications Mode after reading
- your mail. Connects should then be logged at the
- time you read the mail, not at the time they took
- place.
-
- 18.23.7.3 QRV + CTEXT TOGGLE
-
- This is the same as the QRV state but CMSG is
- toggled on/off. When stations connect to you while
- LAN-LINK is active, they will not receive the
- CTEXT message. When other stations connect to you
- while LAN-LINK is not active, they will receive
- the CTEXT message
-
- 18.23.7.4 BBS
-
- This option lets you activate the PBBS in the TNC
- when you close LAN-LINK. It inhibits the PBBS when
- you bring LAN-LINK up the next time.
-
- 18.23.7.5 SOLO
-
- This option puts the TNC in the SOLO mode when you
- shut down, so as not to fill the buffer in the
- TNC.
-
- 18.23.7.6 BBS+SOLO
-
- This option combines the two previous ones.
-
- Set this value as follows,
-
- 0 = QRT,
- 1 = QRV,
- 2 = QRV + CMSG toggle,
- 3 = BBS,
- 4 = SOLO, and
- 5 = BBS+SOLO.
-
- 18.23.8 Set Default Users
-
- This option allows you to set the maximum number of
- multiple users that can be connected to your TNC at the
- same time, and to configure the default start up mode
- of the program. If this parameter is set to 1, LAN-LINK
- will configure itself to the single user mode, and set
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 81
-
-
- the maximum number of users to 9. If this parameter is
- set to any number other that 1, LAN-LINK will assume
- that value to be the maximum number of allowed
- connects, and configure itself in the Multiple user
- Mode (equivalent to the TNC Menu Option 0).
-
- 18.23.9 Set UTC Offset
-
- This parameter contains the difference in hours between
- UTC and your local time. For example, if you are
- located on the east coast of the USA, and it is winter,
- you are in the EST which is 5 hours behind UTC. In this
- case, the value of the UTC Offset parameter is 5.
- Don't forget to change this when the clocks are
- adjusted each spring and autumn.
-
- 18.24 Change PC Communications Parameters
-
- This sub-menu allows you to change the Communications
- Parameters between the PC and the TNC, as described in the
- following paragraphs.
-
- 18.24.1 The Communications Port
-
- This is the default Communications port. The default
- value is 1. You may set it at any value between 1 and
- 4. If you only have one serial port in your PC, set the
- parameter to '1' even if your card is configured as
- Com2. LAN-LINK will ALWAYS assume Com1 for a single
- card. If you use a different port instead of Com1, and
- plan to do binary transfers, don't forget to customize
- the QZ*.BAT files.
-
- The Com3 and Com4 port addresses are as follows.
-
- Port Address IRQ
- Com3 3E8 4
- Com4 2E8 3
-
- 18.24.2 The Terminal Baud Rate
-
- This Parameter tells LAN-LINK what baud rate the TNC is
- set to. This is the baud rate on the RS-232 line
- between the TNC and the computer. Valid baud rates for
- LAN-LINK are 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19,200. If
- you specify something else LAN-LINK will default to
- 1200.
-
- You may experience problems when using baud rates
- greater than 1200. It depends on the CPU clock rate and
- the I/O card in the PC. LAN-LINK scans the incoming
- text constantly, something which requires time. My PK-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 82
-
-
- 232, when used with my XT Clone at 10MHz, does not like
- baud rates faster than 2400, and sometimes not even
- that. The PK-232 seems to drop the first character of
- some lines at 4800 baud. Use 1200 until you have tested
- and are sure that a faster one will work.
-
- This program has been tested on a TNC2 and an MFJ1278
- using a terminal baud rate of 9600 baud and worked
- correctly. It also works correctly with a KAM at 2400
- Baud.
-
- If you use a different rate instead of 1200, and plan
- to do binary transfers, don't forget to customize the
- QZ*.BAT files.
-
- 18.24.3 TNC Data Bits
-
- You can set the number of data bits on the RS-232 line
- between the computer and TNC to 7 or 8. Use 7 with a
- TNC 2 if you have problems with Greek characters.
-
- Set this value to either 7 or 8.
-
- 18.24.4 TNC Parity
-
- Use this parameter to set the Parity bit on the RS-232
- line between the computer and TNC as described below.
-
- 0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even, 3 = Mark, 4 = Space.
-
- 18.24.5 Number of TNC Stop Bits
-
- You can set the number of stop bits on the RS-232 line
- between the computer and the TNC to 1 or 2. Use 1 at
- all terminal (not packet) baud rates except 300.
-
- Set this value to 1 or 2.
-
- 18.25 Change Colors
-
- This option lets you change the default colors. A display of
- all of the combinations is shown on the left side of the
- screen. You will then be prompted to sequence through each
- window/message color that can be customized. Enter the
- number shown in the combination window followed by the
- 'Enter' key to set a value. If you don't wish to make a
- change, just press the 'Enter' Key.
-
- The following identifications are made to the color choices:
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 83
-
-
- 18.25.1 OutWindow Color
-
- This is the color of the text (typed at the keyboard)
- in the outgoing window.
-
- 18.25.2 StatusWindow Color
-
- This is the color of the Status Window.
-
- 18.25.3 PromptWindow Color
-
- This is the color of most of the menus.
-
- 18.25.4 LogWindow Color
-
- This is the color of the text in the log window.
-
- 18.25.5 InWindow Color
-
- This is the color of the text in the window showing the
- incoming characters.
-
- 18.25.6 ScrollBackWindow color
-
- This is the color of the text in the Scroll back
- window.
-
- 18.25.7 MHWindow Color
-
- This is the color of the text in the monitor heard
- calls (MH) window.
-
- 18.25.8 Alarmwindow Color
-
- This is the color of the text in the Error and Alarm
- window.
-
- 18.25.9 BottomWindow Color
-
- This is the color of the text in the prompt line at the
- bottom of the screen.
-
- 18.25.10 Emphasis Color
-
- This is the color of the emphasized text in the Menu
- windows.
-
- 18.25.11 Prompt Color
-
- This is the color of the prompt text in the Menu
- windows.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 84
-
-
- 18.25.12 Option Color
-
- This is the color of selected option text in the Menu
- windows.
-
- 18.25.13 Connected Text Color
-
- This is the color of the text in the incoming window
- when connected in the packet communications modes.
-
- 18.25.14 Computer Color
-
- This is the color of the computer generated text in the
- outgoing window when the Command Echo Flag option is
- enabled.
-
- 18.25.15 VHF Header Color
-
- This is the color of the VHF Header lines in the
- Incoming window when not connected.
-
- 18.25.16 HF Header Color
-
- This is the color of the HF Header lines in the
- Incoming window when not connected.
-
- 18.25.17 Alert Call Color
-
- This is the color of the packet header lines containing
- the Alert call in the Incoming window when not
- connected. It is also the color of the non-permanent
- Parameter Menu prompts.
-
- 18.25.18 Outgoing Text Color
-
- This is the color of the outgoing text echoed in the
- Incoming window in the AMTOR Communications Mode.
-
- 18.25.19 Multi I/O Stream Color[1]
-
- This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming
- window in the Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O
- stream 1.
-
- 18.25.20 Multi I/O Stream Color[2]
-
- This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming
- window in the Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O
- stream 2.
-
- 18.25.21 Multi I/O Stream Color[3]
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 85
-
-
- This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming
- window in the Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O
- stream 3.
-
- 18.25.22 Multi I/O Stream Color[4]
-
- This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming
- window in the Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O
- stream 4.
-
- 18.25.23 Multi I/O Stream Color[5]
-
- This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming
- window in the Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O
- stream 5.
-
- 18.25.24 Multi I/O Stream Color[6]
-
- This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming
- window in the Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O
- stream 6.
-
- 18.25.25 Multi I/O Stream Color[7]
-
- This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming
- window in the Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O
- stream 7.
-
- 18.25.26 Multi I/O Stream Color[8]
-
- This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming
- window in the Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O
- stream 8.
-
- 18.25.27 Multi I/O Stream Color[9]
-
- This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming
- window in the Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O
- stream 9.
-
- 18.25.28 Multi I/O Stream Color[10]
-
- This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming
- window in the Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O
- stream 10.
-
- NOTE that LAN-LINK does not overwrite all existing windows.
- Thus if you want to be sure of seeing the changed colors,
- save the color changes using the Update option, and then
- exit from and reload LAN-LINK.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 86
-
-
- 18.26 Change SAREX Parameters
-
- This sub-menu allows you to change the SAREX Ground Station
- parameters, as described in the following paragraphs.
-
- 18.26.1 SAREX CallSign
-
- This is the callsign of the SAREX station.
-
- 18.26.2 Change SAREX Capture to Disk File
-
- This option lets you change the name of the SAREX
- Capture-to-disk file. Don't change file names while
- capture-to-disk is in progress (flashing [S] in the
- status window), or the old one will stay open and may
- not close properly when LAN-LINK is terminated, result
- ing in data loss.
-
- 18.27 Update Configuration File
-
- Use this option to save the changes (permanently) in the
- configuration file (LAN-LINK.SYS). Activate it twice to see
- most of the changes.
-
- 18.28 Verify Changes
-
- This feature lets you display how LAN-LINK was configured by
- the LAN-LINK.SYS file. It also displays the state of any
- flags you have set/reset if they are not already shown in
- the Status window or Parameter Menu. YOU SHOULD USE IT AFTER
- EDITING THE LAN-LINK.SYS FILE TO MAKE SURE that EVERYTHING
- IS CORRECT.
-
- 18.29 Change Scan Words
-
- In the ZAP BBS feature you can ask the program to scan the
- lines read from the BBS and if it sees any of the scan words
- in the line, it will queue a request for that bulletin by
- number. You can only set 16 such Scan words (should be
- enough) and request up to 63 messages/bulletins at a time.
-
- Use the 'Delete' key to delete a word from the list.
-
- NOTE that words that show up in the BBS prompt line are
- ILLEGAL. For example if your BBS prompts you with
-
- N4QQ BBS>
-
- then 'N4QQ' and 'BBS' should not be used as Scan Words.
-
- DON'T LEAVE A BLANK LINE IN THE SCAN WORD SECTION OF THE
- CONFIGURATION FILE.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 87
-
-
-
- 18.30 Turn Misc. Flag ON/OFF
-
- The Miscellaneous Flag performs several different functions
- in the different Communications modes as follows.
-
- 18.30.1 All Modes:- Debug or state-sequence numbers
-
- Shows debug or state-sequence numbers in left hand
- corner of the status window. These are used to figure
- out what went wrong in the automatic sequences.
-
- 18.30.2 BAUDOT Mode:- Navy MARS Protocol Verify
-
- When the flag is set, and the BAUDOT Navy MARS option
- is enabled, the character string ':CR:' will be
- displayed in the outgoing window each time a carriage
- return character is received in the incoming window.
- Similarly, every time a line feed character is
- received, a ':LF:' will be displayed in the incoming
- window.
-
- You may use this feature to verify that another station
- is sending files using the correct protocol. If you do,
- make sure that you tell the PK-232 not to add a line
- feed to incoming carriage returns by setting 'ALFD OFF'
- in the Command Mode. You will have to set 'ALFD ON'
- again when you change communications modes or all
- incoming lines will overwrite each other.
-
- 18.31 Change Band/Mode
-
- This option is used to set the band and radio mode without
- invoking the Log Menu. You use it when changing from packet
- vhf to an hf mode.
-
- 18.32 Zap BBS on Next Mail Beacon
-
- This parameter causes LAN-LINK to Zap your local BBS next
- time it beacons with a list of calls for which it has Mail.
- It is the same as the option described in Section 7.13.
-
- 18.33 BBS Zap, Don't Disconnect After Sequence
-
- This parameter stops LAN-LINK from issuing the automatic
- disconnect when the Zap sequence is over. You can set it
- during the Zap sequence. Use it to stop the disconnect if
- the sequence gets out of sync with the messages, or if there
- is something interesting you wish to do to the BBS. This
- parameter resets when the Zap sequence terminates.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 88
-
-
- 19.0 Q Codes [NC/L]
-
- This option displays help information about the use of the
- Network Communications Language (NC/L) "Q" codes.
-
- 20.0 Communications Modes
-
- This menu allows you to change the communications mode of the
- TNC. If your TNC hardware cannot support those modes, don't
- bother to try them. This is software not hardware, and in spite
- of what people tell you, software can't do everything. The
- following communications modes are available.
-
- V VHF PACKET
- H HF PACKET
- A AMTOR (STANDBY RECEIVE)
- B BAUDOT (RTTY)
- C MORSE (CW)
- M AMTOR (ALIST [chirpcopy])
- S ASCII (RTTY)
- G SIGNAL
- N NAVTEX
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice. Don't forget to
- select the correct Radio port on the PK-232.
-
- 20.1 VHF PACKET
-
- This is the 1200 baud VHF Packet Mode. LAN-LINK will
- optimize the TNC link parameters for this mode.
-
- 20.2 HF PACKET
-
- This is the 300 baud HF Packet Mode. LAN-LINK will optimize
- the TNC link parameters for this Mode.
-
- 20.3 ASCII (RTTY)
-
- This is the ASCII RTTY Mode. LAN-LINK will configure the TNC
- parameters for this Mode at 110 baud.
-
- 20.4 BAUDOT (RTTY)
-
- This is the BAUDOT RTTY Mode. LAN-LINK will configure the
- TNC parameters for this Mode at 45 baud.
-
- 20.5 MORSE (CW)
-
- This is the CW Mode. LAN-LINK will configure the TNC
- parameters for this Mode at 20 wpm (10 wpm for the KAM).
-
- In this Mode the ALT-D Key will disengage the receive speed
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 89
-
-
- lock inside the PK-232 to facilitate locking onto another
- signal and Function Key 8 (F8) will turn the transmitter
- off.
-
- LAN-LINK will set the XMITOK parameter in the PK-232 to
- "OFF" when you enter the CW communications mode, and turn it
- "ON" again when you call up any other communication mode
- FROM THE COMMUNICATIONS MENU.
-
- 20.6 AMTOR (STANDBY RECEIVE)
-
- When you select the AMTOR Standby Mode you are placed into
- the 'Standby Receive' Mode. If you are in AMTOR Standby
- Mode, you will not be able to display signals of the
- Chirpcopy Mode (which means that you will not be able to
- display a QSO in progress).
-
- The Alt-D Key or Function Key 8 (F8) toggles between the
- AMTOR ARQ and the ALIST communications modes.
-
- 20.7 AMTOR (ALIST [chirpcopy])
-
- If you want to read the mail on an existing AMTOR QSO in
- progress, select the AMTOR ALIST or Chirpcopy Mode.
-
- The Alt-D key or Function key 8 (F8) toggles between the
- AMTOR ARQ and the ALIST communications modes.
-
- 20.8 SIGNAL
-
- Use the 'G' option to select the 'SIGNAL' Mode. Read the PK-
- 232 documentation carefully to understand how this mode
- works. Once the PK-232 has identified the digital signal it
- is tuned to, use the Communications Mode Select Menu a
- second time to select the relevant mode and then set the
- baud rates and shift to display the data if necessary.
-
- 20.9 NAVTEX
-
- Use the 'N' option to select the 'NAVTEX Mode. Read the PK-
- 232 documentation carefully to understand how this Mode
- works.
-
- 21.0 Terminal Mode Menu
-
- This menu allows you to set the Terminal Configuration Mode. The
- Terminal Menu provides different choices depending on which
- communications mode you have selected.
-
- 21.1 Packet Terminal Menu
-
- The Packet Terminal Mode of operation will be shown in the
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 90
-
-
- Status window at the top of the screen. If you are reading
- the mail on a station, the callsign of that station will be
- shown next to the word "MAIL". If you are connected to
- someone, the call (and path) will be shown prefixed by the
- "*>" sequence.
-
- In the Packet Communications Mode, you are presented with
- the following choices.
-
- B Change Packet Baud Rate
- C CQ/Beacons
- E Everything
- O Turn Metabeacon ON/OFF
- M Read the Mail
- S Just My Station (Solo)
- T All Traffic
- 0 Multiple User Connects
- 1 Single User Connects
- F Conference
- R Conference Bridge On/Off
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- 21.1.1 Change Packet Baud Rate
-
- In the PACKET Mode you may change the RF baud rate
- between 300, 600, 1200 and 2400 baud.
-
- 21.1.2 CQ/Beacons
-
- In this Mode, you will see CQ and BEACON packets on the
- channel. (This corresponds to 'MONITOR 1'on the PK-
- 232).
-
- This Mode only works on the PK-232 and the KAM.
-
- 21.1.3 Everything
-
- You can set the TRAFFIC Mode to 'Everything'. It
- corresponds to 'MONITOR 6' on the PK-232.
-
- 21.1.4 Read the Mail
-
- You can read the mail on a BBS or other station and get
- bulletins without connecting to that station yourself.
- You use this Mode to do so. You will be prompted for
- the call whose packets you wish to monitor. Remember to
- enter the call of the station sending the packets, not
- the call of the one receiving them. (This corresponds
- to 'MONITOR 0' and 'MBX' callsign). This Mode only
- works without showing the packet headers on the PK-232.
- On the other TNCs the headers will also be displayed.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 91
-
-
-
- You can also use this command to monitor both sides
- (read the mail) on a QSO on a busy packet channel.
-
- You may want to turn the Digipeat Data Display Mode off
- when reading the mail.
-
- 21.1.5 Just My Station (Solo)
-
- In this Mode, you will only see messages addressed to
- you. You will only get messages from people who connect
- to you. (This corresponds to 'MONITOR 0' or 'MONITOR
- OFF').
-
- 21.1.6 All Traffic
-
- In this Mode you will see all of the data packet
- traffic on channel. You can use this Mode to check that
- the TNC is working. (This corresponds to 'MONITOR 4' or
- 'MONITOR ON').
-
- 21.1.7 Single User Connects
-
- This is the normal one-on-one Mode of operation ('USERS
- 1').
-
- 21.1.8 Multiple User Connects
-
- When you are in a Multiple Connect Mode, an asterisk
- will be shown in the status window next to the word
- 'PACKET'. Each I/O stream will show up in the Inwindow
- in a different color.
-
- LAN-LINK supports two multiple connect modes,
- Individual and Conference.
-
- An extract of an actual 'off the air' CRT display
- (showing received text only) in a multi-user mode is
- shown below. Note each line of text as received by the
- TNC is prefixed (by the PK-232) with the I/O channel
- number and callsign of the station its connected to.
-
- 1:4X4IL: *** CONNECTED to 4X4IL via 4X4IC, 4X6JP
- 0:4X4IC: joe do u read?
- 2:4Z4ZB: *** CONNECTED to 4Z4ZB
- 1:4X4IL: Look for me on PR via 4X6JP 73s and Shalom.
- 2:4Z4ZB: GE JOE I WILL DIS THEN U CAN GO VIA THE REP>
- 1: *** DISCONNECTED: 4X4IL via 4X4IC, 4X6JP
- 0:4X4IC: UNPROTO CQ
- 2:4Z4ZB: GO AHEAD BOYS...DE ALON..>
- 0:4X4IC:
- 2: *** DISCONNECTED: 4Z4ZB
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 92
-
-
-
- This is the normal Multiconnect Mode as described in
- the TNC manual. Here you are connected to up to 10
- stations and will send different traffic to each of
- them. Each time you wish to send something to a
- particular station, you must select the I/O channel the
- station is connected on before typing the text or
- sending the file.
-
- The stream change character for all TNCs in the VHF
- multiple connect modes is '|' ($7C). In the KAM, it is
- '\' on HF and '|' on VHF. They are both on the same key
- but one is in the shift case. Be careful on HF as the
- '\' shows up in file directories and confuses the
- computer. THESE VALUES ARE HARD CODED INTO LAN-LINK. IF
- YOU USE SOMETHING ELSE, THE COLOR AND OTHER MULTIPLE
- CONNECT FEATURES WILL NOT WORK CORRECTLY.
-
- You select the I/O channel using the Alt-N key and
- moving the cursor to the desired stream, or by typing
- the '|' character followed by (in the TNC) the channel
- letter/number. For example to do it manually, if you
- are connected to G8BTB on I/O channel 0 and to G3ZCZ on
- I/O channel 1, then to talk to G8BTB you would type
- '|0' before any text, and similarly to send something
- to G3ZCZ you would type a '|1' before the text you're
- going to send me. If you are not using a PK-232, read
- the TNC manual to determine if the I/O streams are
- identified by numbers or by letters. The TNC2 standard
- configuration uses letters (|A etc.).
-
- Use the Alt-N key and move the cursor up and down to
- select the I/O channel automatically.
-
- 21.1.9 Conference
-
- In the Conference Mode on the other hand, everything
- that you type at the keyboard is automatically
- transmitted to each station that you are connected
- with. Thus if you are linked to two stations each line
- will be packeted twice by the TNC. You don't have to
- worry about sending the wrong thing to the wrong
- person, as they will all get the stuff.
-
- You enter this Mode by selecting the 'F' option in the
- Terminal Menu. You terminate this Mode by selecting the
- '1' option.
-
- You connect in the usual manner using Alt-C or the
- Connect Option in the Call Menu. You MUST WAIT FOR A
- CONNECTION TO BE ESTABLISHED OR TIME OUT before
- attempting to connect to the next station. If you do
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 93
-
-
- not, you will get an error message back from the TNC.
-
- In the Conference Mode, as the same text is transmitted
- on all I/O channels, the throughput will be reduced.
- Slow down your typing speed or use short packets.
- Should you check the link status or call monitored
- list, you may not be able to get back into the Converse
- Mode if you have too many packets outstanding. If that
- happens, wait a while and then try to set the Converse
- Mode with Function Key 10 (F10). You may have to try it
- a few times, depending on how good your links are.
-
- DON'T TRY TO SEND A FILE IN THE CONFERENCE MODE, IT IS
- NOT DESIGNED FOR IT. KEEP THE PACKETS SHORT.
-
- BE ALSO WARNED that IF YOU USE THE CONFERENCE (BRIDGE)
- MODE ON BAD LINKS (SUCH AS CROWDED HF CHANNELS AND
- OTHERS WITH LOTS OF RETRIES), THE KEYBOARD MAY SEEM TO
- LOCK UP, WHILE LAN-LINK WAITS FOR SPACE IN THE TNC
- BUFFER TO OUTPUT THE TEXT.
-
- The Conference Mode will only work in the PK-232 if
- DCDCONN is set to ON. So if you are using a PK-232,
- LAN-LINK will do it for you when you enter the
- Conference Terminal Mode in case you forgot or/and
- haven't set the LAN-LINK.SYS file to include the line
- 'DCD ON'. At the same time set LAN-LINK.SYS default
- states to show the calls of other stations on each
- incoming line in the Multiconnect modes (read the TNC
- manual on how to do this).
-
- The Conference Mode will only work in the TNC2 if
- DCDCONN is jumpered so that Pin 8 of the RS-232
- Interface changes state when you connect to someone
- else. If you get error messages and see the characters
- '|J' on your screen, then the jumper probably isn't
- set.
-
- The Conference Mode does not work on the TNC1.
-
- In the Conference Mode, if any one of the stations
- disconnects, the TNC will return to the Command Mode,
- and you must use Function Key 10 (F10) to return to the
- Converse Mode before you type another character of
- text.
-
- 21.1.10 Conference Bridge On/Off
-
- This option toggles the Conference Bridge on and off.
- In the Bridge Multiconnect Mode you are acting as a
- central switch. You can link together up to 10 stations
- in one multiway connection. In this Mode any packets
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 94
-
-
- arriving on any stream are echoed to all other streams
- that you have 'connects' on except the one that they
- came in on. Anything you type will be sent to all
- connected streams.
-
- In this manner, all stations will not see their own
- text echoed back. Each line of text output by LAN-LINK
- in this Mode will contain the callsign of the station
- originating the packet. Your packets will contain your
- call as entered in line 1 of the LAN-LINK.SYS file.
- Thus for example, if your call was KB8RP/4X and
- normally shows up in the packet header as KB8RP here it
- will show in the data as KB8RP/4X.
-
- Just remember that the Bridge puts out a lot of
- packets, so do multiway connects on a quiet frequency.
- You must be in the Conference Mode to turn the bridge
- on, and any disconnect will take the bridge down.
- Should that happen, toggle it on again. A bridge will
- be shown in the status window whenever the Conference
- Bridge is up.
-
- 21.1.11 Turn Metabeacon On/Off
-
- This option lets you turn the LAN-LINK Metabeacon On
- and Off.
-
- Lan-LINK provides you with a Metabeacon, that gives you
- the capability to transmit a long beacon message at
- periodic intervals. The Metabeacon is loaded from the
- contents of one of the LAN-LINK.00n files. These files
- may be created by the LAN-LINK editor. When loading,
- LAN-LINK will insert a pass character (^V) into the
- text before a carriage return, so as not to end the
- packet before at least 240 characters, and not more
- than 255 characters have been output to the TNC. The
- maximum number of characters that can be loaded into
- the Metabeacon is 1776. The maximum number of packets
- in a Metabeacon is 7. You can also end force a hard
- carriage return or 'end of packet' in the Metabeacon by
- inserting the '\' (backslash) character, which will not
- be transmitted, into the text.
-
- The frequency of Metabeacon transmissions is the same
- as that of the automatic CQ timer.
-
- The MetaBeacon is designed for special event stations.
- PLEASE do not abuse it.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 95
-
-
- 21.2 AMTOR Terminal Menu
-
- In the AMTOR Communications Mode, you are presented with the
- following choices.
-
- C Force Break [ACHG]
- F Start Mode B [FEC]
- L Force LETTERS case
- M Read the Mail [ALISTEN]
- O Override ROBOT/Mailbox
- S Standby Receive [ARQ]
- R Set ROBOT/Mailbox
- W CW Identification
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- 21.2.1 Force Break [ACHG]
-
- This option forces a changeover or 'break in'. If for
- any reason you want to interrupt the other station you
- send a 'BREAK' signal in software this way.
-
- 21.2.2 Start Mode B [FEC]
-
- This option places the terminal into the FEC Transmit
- Mode. This puts you on the air, anything you type will
- be transmitted. Function Key 10 (F10) does the same
- thing.
-
- 21.2.3 Force LETTERS case
-
- This option lets you force the PK-232 receiver to the
- letters case if for some reason you appear to be in the
- numbers case. It will return you to the Converse Mode.
-
- 21.2.4 Read the Mail [ALISTEN/LAMTOR]
-
- This option lets you read the Mail on a QSO.
- Unfortunately, when you tune in a chirping AMTOR QSO in
- the ARQ or Standby Mode you won't get any copy on the
- QSO in progress. You can however read the mail on one
- by entering this Mode.
-
- 21.2.5 Override ROBOT/Mailbox
-
- This option lets you temporarily override the ROBOT
- BEACON and chat to a station that has linked to the
- ROBOT. Use it after the message in LAN-LINK.TXT has
- been sent, namely when the other station is sending a
- message to you.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 96
-
-
- 21.2.6 Standby Receive [ARQ]
-
- This option returns you to the ARQ Standby Mode. You
- must be in this Mode to receive signals from another
- station who is calling you. When you tune for CQ calls,
- they sound somewhat like fast RTTY with a ringing sound
- similar to the connect alarm used by LAN-LINK (but at a
- faster ringing rate).
-
- 21.2.7 Set ROBOT/Mailbox
-
- This option lets you turn on the Mailbox during a
- regular AMTOR QSO so that the other station can leave a
- message or download a file remotely. You must only use
- it when the other station is sending text.
-
- 21.2.8 CW Identification
-
- This option is used to send a CW identification. The
- CWID is sent in the FEC Mode.
-
- The identification consists of the sequence 'DE <your
- callsign>' where your call sign is that entered into
- the PK- 232 as 'MYCALL'.
-
- You use this feature if your license requires you to
- identify in Morse code as well as in the operating
- mode.
-
- 21.2.9 Set ROBOT Infinite Delay
-
- You use this option to prevent the Robot from ever
- transmitting when not linked. In the normal manner, the
- Robot counts down the CQ delay parameter, and, when it
- gets to 0 puts a CQ call on the air. If the Infinite
- Delay is set, the CQ call will be inhibited. This
- option thus puts the Robot into an indefinite wait mode
- where it thinks it has sent out a CQ call and is
- waiting for a reply.
-
- You would use this Mode if you want to set up a MailBox
- on a known frequency for some group or organization.
-
- 21.3 Baudot Terminal Menu
-
- In the Baudot Communications Mode, you are presented with
- the following choices.
-
- B Set Baud Rate
- F Select Shift
- N NAVY MARS Message Protocol
- U USOS Off
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 97
-
-
- S SELCAL On/Off
- W CW Identification
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- 21.3.1 Set Baud Rate
-
- This feature allows you to set a desired communications
- baud rate directly. You will be prompted to enter the
- desired rate. Use this command to avoid having to shift
- through too many intermediate states, if for example,
- you want to make a direct change from 45 to 100 baud.
-
- 21.3.2 Select Shift
-
- This feature lets you select Wide (850 Hz) or narrow
- (170 Hz) shift directly. The PK-232 will copy 170 Hz
- signals using its internal 200 Hz circuitry. If you
- have a KAM, you may also select the Commercial Shift
- (425 Hz).
-
- The shift is displayed in the status window at the top
- of the screen. It is shown as 'W', 'N' or 'C' for wide,
- narrow or commercial respectively.
-
- 21.3.3 NAVY MARS Message Protocol
-
- The Navy Mars option toggles the Navy MARS Mode on and
- off. This feature is only present on the PK-232. When
- active, the feature provides the following protocol.
-
- 21.3.3.1 Any Carriage Return or Enter (CR) from the
- keyboard is sent as CR, CR. (two sequential CR
- characters.
-
- 21.3.3.2 In a file transmission lines are terminated by
- a CR,CR,LF (Line Feed) sequence.
-
- 21.3.3.3 In a file transmission, blank lines are sent
- as a LF (without a CR).
-
- 21.3.3.4 In a file transmission, a plus sign '+' in the
- file is replaced by a sequence of 12 "letters"
- characters. There can be more than one + sign
- on a line.
-
- 21.3.3.5 In a file transmission, the sequence 'NNNN' is
- transmitted followed by a sequence of 12
- "letters" characters. There can only be one
- 'NNNN' sequence on a line.
-
- When the NAVY MARS feature is active a [N] will be
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 98
-
-
- displayed in the status window.
-
- 21.3.4 USOS On/Off
-
- This option toggles the Unshift on space (USOS) feature
- on and off. When the USOS is on, the TNC reverts to the
- letters shift each time a 'space' character is
- received. It helps when displaying noisy copy.
-
- If USOS is active, 'USOS' will be shown in the status
- window at the top of the screen.
-
- 21.3.5 SELCAL On/Off
-
- This command key toggles the SELCAL feature on and off.
- When the SELCAL is activated, as shown in the status
- window, the incoming text from the TNC is scanned. When
- either the letters "ZCZC" or 'your callsign' (as
- entered in line 1 of the LAN-LINK.SYS file) is received
- the "capture-to-disk" is turned on. All subsequent text
- will be stored in the LAN- LINK.RUN file until the
- letters "NNNN" are received. At that time the "capture-
- to-disk" is turned off.
-
- You may use this feature when monitoring commercial
- RTTY broadcasts to record news and other information,
- or when calling CQ to start recording all incoming text
- and keep the QSO on disk.
-
- You may use Function Key 1 (F1) to turn the capture to
- disk permanently on to override the automatic turnoff
- if you wish.
-
- 21.3.6 CW Identification
-
- This option is used to send a CW identification. You
- use this if your license requires you to identify in
- Morse Code as well as in the operating mode.
-
- The identification consists of the sequence 'DE <your
- callsign>' where your call sign is that entered into
- the PK- 232 as 'MYCALL'.
-
- 21.4 ASCII Terminal Menu
-
- In the ASCII Communications Mode, you are presented with the
- following choices.
-
- B Set Baud Rate
- F Select Shift
- S SELCAL set/reset
- W CW Identification
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 99
-
-
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- 21.4.1 Set Baud Rate
-
- This feature allows you to set a desired communications
- baud rate directly. You will be prompted to enter the
- desired rate. Use this command to avoid having to shift
- through too many intermediate states, if for example,
- you want to make a direct change from 110 to 1200 baud.
-
- 21.4.2 Select Shift
-
- This feature lets you select Wide (850 Hz) or narrow
- (170 Hz) shift directly. The PK-232 will copy 170 Hz
- signals using its internal 200 Hz circuitry. If you
- have a KAM, you may also select the Commercial Shift
- (425 Hz).
-
- The shift is displayed in the status window at the top
- of the screen. It is shown as 'W', 'N' or 'C' for wide,
- narrow or commercial respectively.
-
- 21.4.3 SELCAL On/Off
-
- This command key toggles the SELCAL feature on and off.
- When the SELCAL is activated, as shown in the status
- window, the incoming text from the TNC is scanned. When
- either the letters "ZCZC" or 'your callsign' (as
- entered in line 1 of the LAN-LINK.SYS file) is received
- the capture-to-disk is turned on. All subsequent text
- will be stored in the LAN- LINK.RUN disk file until the
- letters "NNNN" are received. At that time the capture-
- to-disk is turned off.
-
- You may use Function Key 1 (F1) to turn the capture to
- disk permanently on to override the automatic turnoff
- if you wish.
-
- 21.4.4 CW Identification
-
- This option is used to send a CW identification. You
- use this if your license requires you to identify in
- Morse code as well as in the operating mode.
-
- The identification consists of the sequence 'DE <your
- callsign>' where your call sign is that entered into
- the PK- 232 as 'MYCALL'.
-
- 21.5 CW Menu
-
- In the CW Communications Mode, you are presented with the
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 100
-
-
- following choices.
-
- L Lock to Receive Signal
- S Set Morse Speed
- U Unlock Morse Speed
-
- Type in the single letter to make your choice.
-
- 21.5.1 Lock to Receive Signal
-
- This option locks the PK-232 to the speed of the
- incoming CW signal.
-
- 21.5.2 Set Morse Speed
-
- This option lets you set the CW speed.
-
- 21.5.3 Unlock Morse Speed
-
- This option unlocks the PK-232 from the incoming CW
- signal. It performs the same task as the Alt-D option
- keys. It is used to speed up capture of a new signal or
- to break the lock when the PK-232 appears to have
- locked up at the wrong speed.
-
- 22.0 eXit to DOS
-
- When you exit the program and return to DOS, if the Shut down
- (QRT) flag is set to 0, the TNC is put into the VHF default mode
- in which it rejects calls from any other stations. (Read about
- the 'CFROM' command in the TNC manual). You can thus, if you
- wish, leave it powered, and if you also leave the VHF radio
- powered up, you will be active as a digipeater, but at the same
- time anyone trying to connect with you will receive a busy sig-
- nal. The MBX command (Reading the Mail) is also cleared at this
- time.
-
- If you want to leave the TNC set up to accept messages when LAN-
- LINK is not active, customize the shut down state as described in
- the Section 18.23.
-
- 23.0 Hot Keys
-
- LAN-LINK also contains a number of "Hot" keys to allow you to
- perform common operations with a minimum of key strokes. The keys
- perform related but slightly different tasks in each
- communications mode. A list of those available is shown in Table
- 23. Should you require any more hot keys, I suggest you use an
- external program with a Keyboard Macro capability such as
- Borland's Superkey.
-
- Consider the action of each key in detail.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 101
-
-
- Table 23 Summary of Hot Keys
- ____________________________________________________________________
- Hot Key Communications Mode
- _______________________________________________________________
- Packet AMTOR BAUDOT/ASCII CW
- ____________________________________________________________________
- A Set ALERT Call ARQ Call/Talk ------ ------
- ____________________________________________________________________
- B Send 'Break' Force Changeover ------ ------
- to TNC
- ____________________________________________________________________
- C Connect ARQ Call Call Call
- ____________________________________________________________________
- D Disconnect Toggle Receive Receive Disengage
- Modes Mode Speed Lock
- ____________________________________________________________________
- E Enter Call Enter Call and Enter Call Enter
- Call
- Selcal
- ____________________________________________________________________
- F Flush TNC Buffer (all communications modes)
- ____________________________________________________________________
- H Display function key Information Screen
- ____________________________________________________________________
- J Jump to DOS (all communications modes)
- ____________________________________________________________________
- K Jump to DOS quick return (all communications modes)
- ____________________________________________________________________
- L Edit Log Entry (all communications modes)
- ____________________________________________________________________
- M Scan Message (all communications modes)
- ____________________________________________________________________
- N Next I/O Stream
- ____________________________________________________________________
- O Turn Robot ON Turn Robot ON ------ -----
- -
- ____________________________________________________________________
- P Turn Printer ON/OFF (all communications modes)
- ____________________________________________________________________
- Q call QRZ call QRZ in FEC call QRZ call
- QRZ
- ____________________________________________________________________
- R Retry Connect Retry last Call (entered).
- (not ZAP)
- ____________________________________________________________________
- S Scan Logbook (all communications modes)
- ____________________________________________________________________
- X Exit to DOS (all communications modes)
- ____________________________________________________________________
- Y Zap PacketCluster ---------------- Transmit RY's ---
- --
- ____________________________________________________________________
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 102
-
-
- Z Zap BBS Drop Link after Receive mode after
- sending contents sending contents
- of buffer of buffer
- ____________________________________________________________________
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 103
-
-
-
- 23.1 Alt-A - Alert Call (Packet) and AMTOR ARQ Call/talk
-
- In the Packet Communications Mode, this key combination
- performs the same task as the Alert Call option in the Call
- Menu.
-
- In the AMTOR Communications Mode, this key combination
- performs the same task as the AMTOR ARQ call/talk option in
- the Call menu.
-
- 23.2 Alt-B - Send Break/AMTOR Changeover
-
- In the Packet Communications Mode, activating this key
- combination sends a 'BREAK' signal to the TNC. Use this key
- combination to get out of the TNC's transparent mode.
-
- In the AMTOR Communications Mode, use this key combination
- to force a changeover. You can type text into the outgoing
- buffer and then force a changeover without losing that text.
-
- 23.3 Alt-C - Call/Connect to
-
- This key combination performs the same task as the Call
- option in the Call Menu.
-
- 23.4 Alt-D - Disconnect or Receive
-
- This key combination performs the same task as Function Key
- 8 (F8) EXCEPT in MORSE and AMTOR.
-
- In Morse this key disengages the receive speed lock in the
- PK-232 to unlock the PK-232 from the last signal copied. It
- lets you lock onto another signal faster.
-
- In AMTOR this key toggles the receive mode between ARQ and
- FEC signals (Qso's in progress and Cq calls).
-
- 23.5 Alt-E - Enter Call
-
- This key combination performs the same task as the Enter
- Call option in the Call Menu.
-
- 23.6 Alt-F - Flush TNC Buffer
-
- This key combination performs the same task as the Flush TNC
- Outgoing buffer option in the TNC Menu.
-
- 23.7 Alt-J - Jump to DOS
-
- This key combination lets you "Jump to a DOS Shell". It
- performs the same function as the 'J' option in the Main
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 104
-
-
- Menu.
-
- 23.8 Alt-K - Jump to DOS, Quick Return
-
- This key combination lets you "Jump to a DOS Shell". it
- performs the same function as the 'J' option in the Main
- Menu. When the command is executed, control is returned to
- LAN-LINK without the 'type exit to quit the shell sequence'.
-
- 23.9 Alt-L - Edit Log
-
- This key combination performs the same task as the Edit
- option in the Log Menu.
-
- 23.10 Alt-M - Message Scan
-
- This key combination performs the same task as the Message
- Scan choice in the Message Menu.
-
- 23.11 Alt-N - Next Stream
-
- In the Packet Communications Mode, if you are using the
- multiple connect capability of LAN-LINK, this key
- combination prompts you to change I/O streams, and display
- the state of the I/O streams showing which ones were last
- used to send or receive something. To change I/O streams,
- move the cursor to the desired stream then push the 'Enter'
- Key. The calls in the Next Stream window update when
- stations connect and disconnect. In the event of the window
- not being correct, you may manually enter or delete calls
- using the 'Insert' Key to enter a call, and the 'Delete' Key
- to remove a call.
-
- The data about the streams will be shown in the same colors
- as the multistream text colors.
-
- 23.12 Alt-O - Turn Robot On
-
- This key combination performs the same function as the Set
- ROBOT option in the AMTOR Terminal Menu. The hot key combi
- nation however, is active in both the Packet and AMTOR
- communications modes.
-
- This function key also puts the Packet and AMTOR Contest
- operation into automatic.
-
- 23.13 Alt-P - Turn Printer ON/OFF
-
- This key combination performs the same function as the
- toggle printer on/off option in the Parameter Menu.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 105
-
-
- 23.14 Alt-Q - Call QRZ
-
- This key combination transmits the sequence 'QRZ QRZ QRZ DE
- YOURCALL' and turns the transceiver back to receive. In
- AMTOR, it sends the sequence in FEC and adds the SELCAL.
-
- 23.15 Alt-R - Retry Call/Connect
-
- This key combination performs the same task as the Retry
- choice in the Call Menu.
-
- 23.16 Alt-S - Scan Log
-
- This key combination performs the same function as the Scan
- option in the LOG Menu.
-
- 23.17 Alt-X - Exit to DOS
-
- This key combination performs the same task as the Exit to
- Dos choice in the Main Menu. It exits the program and
- returns you to DOS.
-
- 23.18 Alt-Y - Zap PacketCluster/RTTY Transmit RYs.
-
- In the Packet Communications Mode, this key combination
- performs the same task as the PacketCluster choice in the
- Call Menu. It connects you to the PacketCluster and issues
- the 'SHOW/WWV' and 'SHOW/DX' instructions when connected.
-
- In the RTTY communications mode, this key causes a sequence
- of RYs to be transmitted. Note that with solid state
- equipment in use in most stations, there should be little
- need to send RYs during a QSO. They made be used as a tuning
- signal.
-
- 23.19 Alt-Z - Zap BBS
-
- This key combination performs the same task as the Zap BBS
- choice in the Call Menu.
-
- 23.20 Alt-= - Toggle Miscellaneous Flag
-
- This key combination performs the same function as the +
- option in the parameters menu.
-
- 23.21 End - > +? [Over]
-
- In the Packet Communications Mode this command sends your
- callsign followed by the > and Line feed characters. You may
- use this to signal 'OVER' in a packet contact.
-
- In the AMTOR Communications Mode this command sends the '+?'
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 106
-
-
- sequence of characters which is the software 'OVER' signal.
-
- In the MORSE and RTTY (Baudot and ASCII) communications
- modes, this command lets you transmit the 'KN' sequence and
- returns you to the Receive Mode. For example if you are
- 4X6AA and you are working G3ZCZ then you would use Function
- Key 3 (F3) to transmit the sequence 'G3ZCZ de 4X6AA' and
- this key to send 'KN' and revert to receive. You use this at
- the END of a transmission in any mode except Packet.
-
- If you have typed something into the 'type ahead buffer'
- then press this key, the contents of the buffer will be
- transmitted followed by the turnover command.
-
- 23.22 PgUp - Scrollback (Scrolls back incoming text)
-
- This key lets you repeat the display of up to 255 lines of
- incoming text which has scrolled out of the incoming window.
- You may print it or capture it to disk during the repeat.
-
- A small menu displays your options when showing the scroll
- back information. You may move the menu window up and down
- with the left and right arrow keys. Use the 'ESC' key to
- terminate the Scrollback Mode.
-
- You can save the contents scrollback buffer displayed on the
- screen by turning the "Capture-to-Disk' on, and then writing
- text to the window. Anything written will be captured. If
- the Capture-to-disk is ON before or during scrollback, you
- will get two copies of the text in the file.
-
- 23.23 The Home Key
-
- The Home Key will clear the window screen that the cursor
- happens to be in at the time that the key was depressed, and
- will then position the cursor at the top left hand corner of
- that window.
-
- 23.24 The Down Arrow Key
-
- The Down Arrow Key toggles the Normal/Reverse Sideband
- command in all PK-232 communications modes except MORSE. The
- sideband is depicted in the status window by the Up and Down
- arrows. If the Down Arrow is showing, you are set for Lower
- Sideband (LSB) which is the one normally used.
-
- If you have reversed the sidebands a flashing Up Arrow will
- be displayed.
-
- If you set your transceiver to LSB you will be set correctly
- for all modes.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 107
-
-
- For CW operation you may set your rig to the CW position and
- ignore the sideband setting. If you use FSK just set it so
- that it works for you.
-
- 23.25 Shift/Baudrate Control Keys
-
- The following keys are used to control the Shift (Wide or
- narrow) and the Radio link Baudrate in the BAUDOT and ASCII
- communications modes. In the BAUDOT and ASCII communications
- modes all baud rates supported by the PK-232 may be
- selected.
-
- 23.25.1 RIGHT ARROW speeds up the baud rate.
- 23.25.2 LEFT ARROW slows down the baud rate.
- 23.25.3 UP ARROW toggles the shift from Wide shift (850
- Hz) to Narrow shift (170 Hz) and back.
- 23.25.4 DELETE toggles the USOS command (RTTY only).
-
- In the CW communications mode, the left and right
- arrows change the CW speed by 1 wpm.
-
- The state of each of the above commands are displayed
- in the status window at the top of the screen. If USOS
- is active, 'USOS' will be shown. The shift is shown as
- 'W' or 'N' for wide or narrow respectively.
-
- 23.26 Control-Z (^Z)
-
- This key combination is used in the Packet Communication
- Mode to signal the end of a file or message, when loading
- messages into another LAN-LINK system or into a BBS. In the
- AMTOR Communications Mode, it is automatically translated
- into the sequence ' :EOF: +? ' which can be used to
- terminate a message being stored in another LAN-LINK AMTOR
- mailbox.
-
- 24.0 LAN-LINK Disk Files
-
- The following disk files are associated with the program.
-
- LAN-LINK.COM
- LAN-LINK.SYS
- *.RUN
- LAN-LINK.LOG
- LAN-LINK.DIR
- CONFIG.SYS
- *.MBX
- *.BBS
- LAN-LINK.001 .. LAN-LINK.010
- QBU-RX.BAT
- QBU-TX.BAT
- LAN-LINK.QTA
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 108
-
-
- QZ*.BAT
-
- Consider each of them in turn.
-
- 24.1 LAN-LINK.EXE
-
- This is the program. You activate it from DOS by typing the
- word LAN-LINK followed by ENTER in the normal manner of
- invoking DOS commands.
-
- 24.2 LAN-LINK.SYS
-
- This file contains the configuration information for both
- the program and the TNC. YOU MUST EDIT IT before you run the
- program on the air the first time. Use the customization
- options in the parameters menu to make the changes.
-
- The contents of first few lines of the default file together
- with an item number are shown below.
-
- 1. Callsign
- 2. Selcal
- 3. CQ Text
- 4. Band
- 5. Power
- 6. CQ Delay (seconds)
- 7. CQ Delay (minutes)
- 8. :QSP: Message Relay Flag
- 9. PC Serial Communications Port Number
- 10. TNC Type
- 11. PC to TNC Baud Rate
- 12. VHF Log Book File
- 13. HF Log Book File
- 14. GMT Offset
- 15. Path Directory File name
- 16. Brag Tape File name
- 17. BBS Snatch Mail Trigger Word
- 18. QTC Snatch Flag
- 19. BBS Snatch Flag
- 20. Shut Down Mode
- 21. PC to TNC Data Bits
- 22. PC to TNC Parity Bits
- 23. PC to TNC Stop Bits
- 24. DCD Flag
- 25. QBM Download Subdirectory
- 26. BBS Read Request Command
- 27. Local BBS Callsign
- 28. SAREX Callsign
- 29. SAREX Capture to Disk File name
- 30. PacketCluster Call
- 31. Digipeat Detect Flag
- 32. Node Drop Link Flag
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 109
-
-
- 33. Sound Flag
- 34. Display Computer Generated Commands Flag
- 35. Digipeat PK-232 Date/timestamp in Call Sequence Flag
- 36. Keyboard Character Beep value.
- 37. :QBU: Receiving Station Batch file (QBU-RX.BAT)
- 38. :QBU: Originating Station Batch file (QBU-TX.BAT)
- 39. Capture-to-disk Flag
- 40. Beacon Control/LAN-LINK handshake Flag
- 41. Spare
- 42. Start of Scan Words (MUST HAVE AT LEAST ONE)
- 43. * end of Scan Words
- 44. Start of Common Calls (MUST HAVE AT LEAST ONE)
- 45. * end of Common Calls
- 46. Default users
- 47. Start of Custom Colors
- 48. Remaining TNC start up Commands.
-
- The contents of each line are described in the section of
- the Parameters menu which deals with customizing them. The
- remaining lines contain commands to the TNC. For further
- information about them refer to the TNC manual. LAN-LINK
- assumes different defaults in some instances to those set in
- the TNC. The SYS file contains only those that are different
- to the TNC default reset state.
-
- NOTE: If you are not using a TNC1 you MUST set the HEADERLN
- parameter to ON. The packet headers and the text of the
- packets must show up on your screen on separate lines. You
- must also have the "Echo as Sent" feature set ON ('EAS ON'
- for PK-232 and 'XM' ON ' for the KAM).
-
- 24.3 *.RUN
-
- These files contain incoming data from the TNC recorded
- while the 'capture to disk' function was active. LAN-LINK
- names them as YYMMDD.RUN automatically (YY = Year, MM =
- Month, DD = Date, i.e 900903.RUN is a file for 3 Sept 1990).
-
- 24.4 *.DBF (HF.DBF and VHF.DBF)
-
- These file contain the log entries. They are Dbase 3 and 4
- compatible. The format of the logbook file is the same as
- that used by the LOGBOOK package of the PC-HAM software
- package, with more space for comments.
-
- 24.5 LAN-LINK.DIR
-
- This is the directory file as described in Section 6.1.2.
- You use it to store connect, NET/ROM, TheLink, KA-Node or
- digipeat paths as well as name/callsign relationships.
-
- Examples are
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 110
-
-
- Joe G3ZCZ
- Alon 4Z4ZB V 4X6AA
- Milt 4X6AA
- LR 4X6LR
- hf-il 4x4hf v 4z4zb 4x4il
- hf-rj 4x4hf v 4z4zb 4z4rj
- K1HTV ELK v WB4APR-5! SNJ3! NNJ! WMA! SCCT! K1HTV
- w9tnn-2 jrw !% w3eax-7 !& w9tnn-2
-
- You create this file with the editor or by using your word
- processor in its non- document mode. You must leave AT LEAST
- one space character between the first (key) word and the
- connect path. When you type in the key word, the program
- does not care about upper or lower case.
-
- You may also use the 'reMember Path' option in the Call Menu
- to make entries in this file.
-
- If you already have a YAPP.DIR or a PK232COM.DIR file just
- rename it to LAN-LINK.DIR and add any NET/ROM and/or KA-Node
- paths.
-
- NOTE: All path entries in LAN-LINK.DIR must be on a single
- 80 column line.
-
- 24.6 CONFIG.SYS
-
- You must have a CONFIG.SYS file on the boot disk if you are
- going to use the disk logging features. This file must
- contain the line
-
- FILES = 20
-
- See the DOS manual for more information about the CONFIG.SYS
- file.
-
- 24.7 *.MBX
-
- These are the files associated with the stations you have
- designated as LAN store and forward mailboxes. Other
- stations can only :QRU: with you if you have a
- 'theircall.MBX' file on your disk. Thus if for example you
- want to use 4Z4ZB as a store and forward mailbox, you will
- have to create an ASCII file called 4Z4ZB.MBX using Editor,
- or the non-document mode of your word processor. In this
- file you will put a list of the call signs of the stations
- 4Z4ZB can connect to reliably. If for example you want 4Z4ZB
- to be able to store messages from you to 4X6AA, 4X6LR,
- G3ZCZ, ON8IK, F0WN,and G8BTB, you would put those call signs
- in the file, one call on a line as follows.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 111
-
-
- 4X6AA
- 4X6LR
- G3ZCZ
- ON8IK
- F0WN
- G8BTB
-
- When the QRU function is invoked either by you manually or
- by 4Z4ZB connecting to you and sending you the command
- :QRU:, any message files present on your system addressed to
- any of those stations (E.G. G3ZCZ.OUT and ON8IK.OUT) will be
- transferred from you to 4Z4ZB just as if you had tried to
- :QSP: the messages manually or as if G3ZCZ or ON8IK had
- connected directly to you. The file names on your system
- will be changed to *.OLD.
-
- You must create one file for each designated store and
- forward station, ie. 4Z4ZB.MBX, G3ZCZ.MBX etc.
-
- 24.8 *.BBS
-
- These are LOCAL-BBS.BBS AUTO-Upload Command files.
-
- Each file is named for the callsign of the BBS that you wish
- to access. It must have exactly the name as the callsign of
- the BBS. Thus if the BBS is W9TNN-1 the name of the file
- must be W9TNN-1.BBS, or if the BBS is 4Z4ZB then the file
- must be called 4Z4ZB.BBS. The file must be an ASCII file.
- that means the word processor must be used in the non-
- document mode to create it.
-
- This file contains the command sequence that you would have
- typed at the keyboard if you were accessing the BBS
- manually. The ONE difference is that the text of a message
- you are uploading with the S command must be followed by the
- character string :EOF: (on a separate line) as illustrated
- by the example below.
-
- The contents of A TYPICAL *.BBS file are shown below as an
- example.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 112
-
-
- k 1234
- d \net\lan-link.doc
- s g8btb
- Test Message
- This is a test message.
- :EOF:
- sp G3ZCZ @ N4QQ
- Greetings
- The text of this message is greetings from LAN-LINK.
- /ex
- lm
- r 567
- r 593
-
- 24.9 LAN-LINK.001 - LAN-LINK.010
-
- These are 10 different ASCII files with fixed names. They
- can be transmitted using the Alternate function keys. Their
- contents can be viewed using the Shift function keys. In all
- cases the function key to use for a particular file
- corresponds to the number in the file suffix. For example,
- use Alt/Shift Function Key 3 (Alt-F3) to transmit/view file
- LAN-LINK.003. You may also use the Edit Menu to edit/create
- the files.
-
- In case you forget what you put in each of the files, LAN-
- LINK allows you to take a peek into all of them at the same
- time. Use Control Function key 1 (Control-F1) to look at the
- first line of all the LAN-LINK.001 - LAN-LINK.010 files and
- the Brag Tape.
-
- 24.10 QBU-RX.BAT
-
- This is the command or batch file used in the :QBU:
- originating station.
-
- 24.11 QBU-TX.BAT
-
- This is the command or batch file used in the :QBU:
- receiving station.
-
- 24.12 LAN-LINK.QTA
-
- You can leave a message on your system for someone else in a
- file named CALLSIGN.OUT. When the station with that callsign
- connects to you, the message will be sent, and the filename
- will be changed from CALLSIGN.OUT to CALLSIGN.OLD. This is
- fine as long as the path between the stations good. If the
- path is marginal, it is possible that your station will
- transmit the message and change the filename, but the link
- will drop out before the message is received at the other
- station. If the other station does not connect to you and
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 113
-
-
- :QSM:, the message may get lost. If this situation occurs,
- you can tell LAN-LINK that there is a bad path between you
- and that station, and not to change the file names without
- an explicit :QTA: instruction from that other station. You
- do this by putting the call of the station(s) having a bad
- path in an ASCII file called LAN-LINK.QTA. Put one call on
- each line in the form
-
- N9BE
- G8BTB
-
- You must use the root call of the station without an SSID.
- that means, if the station is N9BE-4, just put N9BE in the
- file.
-
- Incoming messages from stations in the LAN-LINK.QTA file
- will automatically be acknowledged by a :QTA:.
-
- 24.13 QZ*.BAT
-
- As any LAN-LINK station can either receive or originate a
- :QZD: and a :QZU: command, LAN-LINK uses four batch files to
- control Zmodem transfers. These files are as follows.
-
- QZU-RX.BAT Batch file implemented after receipt of :QZU:
- QZU-TX.BAT Batch file implemented after transmission of
- :QZU:
- QZD-RX.BAT Batch file implemented after receipt of :QZD:
- QZD-TX.BAT Batch file implemented after transmission of
- :QZD:
-
- Each LAN-LINK user must configure the QZ*.BAT files for
- their systems. The port number in the batch file should be
- set to the PC I/O Port used. The data rate in the batch file
- should be set to the data rate used between the PC and the
- TNC, NOT the data rate used on the radio link.
-
- For example, the default QZU-RX.BAT file of
- 'pcz 1 1200 rz %1' should be changed to
- 'pcz 2 1200 rz %1' if you are have interfaced your TNC to
- Port 2 on your PC, and if, the baud rate between the TNC is
- 2400 baud, the file should be changed to
- 'pcz 2 2400 rz %1'.
-
- Each of the four batch files have to be customized for each
- user who is not using PC Port Com1 and 1200 baud between the
- PC and their TNC. The high level of customization required
- here is because different Zmodem implementations require
- different sequences of instructions and LAN-LINK does not
- want to limit you to a specific one.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 114
-
-
- 25.0 Mailbox features
-
- This section describes the mail box and message handling features
- built into LAN-LINK.
-
- 25.1 Answering Machine
-
- LAN-LINK contains an AMTOR (Robot beacon CQ mode only) and
- PACKET Mode SMART "answering machine" facility. You can
- leave messages on your disk (in the same directory as the
- LAN-LINK.* files, if you are using a hard disk), for
- different stations. When someone connects to you, if you
- left a message for him, he (or she or even it as the case
- may be) and only that station will receive it automatically.
- No one else will normally be able to download that message.
-
- 25.2 Mail Beacon (Annunciator)
-
- To ensure that people know that you have left a message for
- them a 'MAIL for' list is loaded into your Packet Beacon and
- transmitted every 30 minutes (Refer to the BTEXT command in
- the TNC manual) as ':QTC:' followed by a list of calls. If
- no mail is pending, or the only message in your system is
- one addressed to you, the beacon transmissions are
- inhibited. This conforms to good operating practice on
- crowded channels (at least inhibiting the beacon does).
-
- The mail beacon in the AMTOR Mode is transmitted as part of
- the beacon AUTOCQ message. It is automatically updated when
- a message is transmitted. If you don't set the beacon (see
- below) you will not transmit a mail beacon text in your
- AMTOR CQ message.
-
- The Mail beacon text is set up either when you tell the
- computer to set it up or when you disconnect a packet QSO
- from another station.
-
- In this manner you may update the list while the program is
- running, for example by using Sidekick or the included
- Editor, to write a message, or preferably the NOTE feature.
-
- Any station using LAN-LINK can be configured to
- automatically attempt a connect (QTC-Snatch) when seeing
- their callsign in someone else's LAN-LINK :QTC: beacon mail
- message list.
-
- If for some reason the message got lost (e.g. because the
- link was marginal), :QSM: will get you a repeat of that
- message.
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 115
-
-
- 25.3 How to leave a message
-
- You can use the note feature or type the message as a non-
- document file on Wordstar, the included Editor, or if you
- use another word processor, you must leave the message as an
- ASCII text file.
-
- If you use the Note feature, the message will be given a
- header as if it came in from someone else. if you use a word
- processor or the included Editor to write the message, you
- will have to write in a header or show somehow that the
- message is not 'live'. You may then later time tag a message
- header on message files created by the word processor. In
- this way people will realize that it is an automatic message
- by seeing the header. On the other hand, you may wish to
- fool people into thinking that you are home.
-
- You just name the message file as the callsign of the
- station to whom you wish the message to be sent at connect
- time. You must also give it the filetype of 'OUT'.
-
- For example a message for G3ZCZ would be stored on the disk
- as a file named 'G3ZCZ.OUT', and similarly a message to
- 4X6AA would be stored on disk as '4X6AA.OUT'.
-
- Once the message has been sent, an entry to that effect will
- be made in the LAN-LINK.RUN data capture file. The message
- file will then be renamed and given the file extension
- '.OLD'. At that time any previously existing mail file with
- the file extension '.OLD' will be deleted. This stops the
- addressee receiving the message on successive connects if
- you can't delete it for some reason (you forget) while at
- the same time, the message is still available to you in case
- you need it.
-
- You should use a separate utility program if you want the
- calls in the mail beacon sorted. You may for example wish to
- sort them alphanumerically or in the order of the date that
- they were left in your answering machine.
-
- Incoming messages triggered by the QTC-Snatch will be left
- in a message file '<yourcall>.OUT', which can be scanned by
- using the Alt-M Key combination. If you have non LAN-LINK
- friends, train them to trigger the QTC-Snatch by simulating
- a beacon, and prefixing and ending their text with lines
- containing the '>' as the only character. Better yet, give
- them a copy of LAN-LINK and tell them to register it.
-
- 25.4 Remote Beacon Shutdown
-
- I recognize that some stations may abuse the beacon facility
- of this program. I have thus built into the program a
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 116
-
-
- 'remote shutdown' capability. If someone running LAN-LINK
- has their beacon timer set too often, connect to them in the
- AMTOR or Packet Communications modes, and tell them to :QRT:
- which will clear their beacon mode and take them off the air
- for a while at least.
-
- In the Packet Communication Mode, the CQ beacon is shut down
- but the 30 minute mail beacon is not touched. In the AMTOR
- Communication Mode, the CQ delay time is set to infinity.
- The LAN-LINK Mailbox will thus still be active in both
- modes, but will not call CQ on the air.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 117
-
-
- APPENDIX 1. ANOMALIES and BUGS
-
- A1.1 Command/Converse Mode anomalies
-
- Since the Program has no way to check the command/converse mode
- status of the TNC, you may see various Cmd: and error messages
- from the TNC when using the menus or function key commands.
- Ignore them for now. If you get an error message, try using the
- function key again.
-
- A1.2 Buffer messages in AMTOR Beacon CQ Mode
-
- In the AMTOR Beacon CQ Mode, if the other station drops the link
- while you are recording the text, BEFORE the callsign has been
- recognized as a valid callsign, LAN-LINK will time out before
- logging the QSO and restarting the CQ sequence. If someone else
- calls in before the time-out has occurred, the text from both
- stations should be captured to disk, but the log entry may not
- show both stations, thus the 'LOG' must be compared with the
- 'RUN' file for QSO purposes.
-
- LAN-LINK in the Beacon/Mailbox Mode, normally logs the contact at
- the end of the line in which it recognized the callsign as a
- valid callsign.
-
- A1.3 FEC +? responses in AMTOR Beacon CQ Mode
-
- In the AMTOR Beacon CQ or Mailbox mode, if another station sends
- a +? in the FEC Mode, the beacon will attempt to send the LAN-
- LINK.TXT file. The PK-232 however is not in the Converse Mode at
- that time and will interpret the text of the file as commands. If
- by some chance, the text corresponds to a valid command the PK-
- 232 will execute it and put the PK-232 in an unknown state and
- you may not notice that it did. As such I recommend that the
- first character of each line in the file LAN-LINK.TXT be a non
- valid command character such as a number or a period (.) or
- another punctuation sign.
-
- A1.4 Using a CGA card with a monochrome monitor
-
- If you are using a CGA card with a monochrome monitor, the text
- you type into the OUTWINDOW will be fainter than the incoming
- text. This is because of the colors used. If you are using a
- Hercules compatible card you will not notice any difference.
- Change the colors using the Parameter Menu.
-
- A1.5 The Packet Conference Mode
-
- The Conference Mode has been tested on a PK-232, KAM, a SANYO
- MBC-675 which has a clock speed of 4.7MHz and other PC clones
- with faster clock speeds. If you have problems with intermittent
- selection of I/O channels try slowing down your CPU clock. There
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 118
-
-
- is a software delay loop in the program that is used to allow the
- TNC time to switch I/O streams after receipt of the stream change
- command. This delay is there because LAN-LINK tests for a connect
- on each channel before outputting any text, so that it does not
- send unaddressed packets on non connected I/O channels.
-
- A1.6 Packet Conference Mode disconnects
-
- A Packet conference Mode disconnect returns the TNC to the
- Command Mode, even if you remain connected to one or more other
- stations.
-
- A1.7 Strange Events
-
- If the TNC does not use an interrupt driven serial port you may
- experience problems when using baud rates greater than 1200. The
- PK-232 DOES NOT LIKE LAN-LINK to use RS-232 baud rates faster
- than 2400, and sometimes not even that. Use 1200 until YOU have
- tested and ARE SURE that a faster one will work.
-
- IF YOU HAVE ANY STRANGE PROBLEMs AND ARE USING an RS-232 TERMINAL
- BAUD RATE to the TNC WHICH IS GREATER THAN 1200, set the Terminal
- Baud Rate to 1200 and see if the problem goes away.
-
- Make sure that your configuration is set the way you think it is.
- Verify it using the 'display deFault' (and the Misc. Flag if
- necessary) option(s) in the Parameter Menu.
-
- You must have at least one common call or scan word in your SYS
- file, or you will get errors when you update the SYS file.
-
- A1.8 *** DISCONNECTED
-
- In the Packet Communications Mode, when you are connected to
- someone and the TNC sends this text string to the computer, LAN-
- LINK thinks you have been disconnected and resets. This normally
- only happens when a true disconnect occurs. However, if the text
- shows up in the middle of a line being sent to you, it WILL HAVE
- THE SAME EFFECT AND THINK that YOU HAVE DISCONNECTED if the DCD-
- Flag is not set in the SYS file, and the TNC does not use the DCD
- signal on pin 8 of the RS-232 interface.
-
- A1.9 *** CONNECTED
-
- In the Packet Communications Mode, when you are monitoring
- traffic on the LAN someone sends this text string, LAN-LINK
- thinks you have been connected if the DCD-Flag is not set in the
- SYS file, and the TNC does not use the DCD signal on pin 8 of the
- RS-232 interface.
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 119
-
-
- A1.10 Greek Characters and other garbage in the Incoming Screen.
-
- If you see Greek characters in the Incoming screen you probably
- have the wrong parity set in the TNC. first make sure that the
- RS-232 baud rate is correct. If it is, take the batteries out of
- it and reset it. If that fails, play with the parity. LAN-LINK
- sets the serial port as configured in the TNC.SYS file for each
- TNC. For example, for the PK-232 it is 8 bits, no parity, for the
- TNC2 it is 7 bits. If you still can't get it to work, set the
- interface to 7 bits in the configuration file.
-
- A1.11 Dumb TNC
-
- If the TNC seems to respond to commands but is not sending
- anything back, you may have one of two problems. You may have a
- bad RS-232 cable with on wire disconnected. If the computer can
- operate the TNC in another communications program, try to reset
- the TNC, take the batteries out, etc. You may also have a not-so-
- compatible PC.
-
- A1.12 Intermittent Lockup
-
- Watch out for flow control problems on the cable between the TNC
- and the PC and between the PC and the Display.
-
- Versions of LAN.LINK upto and including 1.55 used software
- handshaking. Anytime the program received a Control-S (^S)
- character from the TNC it waited until it subsequently received a
- Control-Q (^Q). These characters can appear on the LAN in a
- binary packet, either when binary file transfers are in progress,
- or in a Inter NET/ROM message. To avoid this lockup, a line
- containing 'MFILTER 19' was added in your LAN-LINK.SYS file so
- make the TNC filter the ^S character out and not pass it to
- LAN.LINK. LAN-LINK 1.56 and onward use hardware handshaking so
- this problem should not appear. However if the FLOW and XFLOW
- parameters are not set to OFF in your TNC, LAN-LINK can appear to
- lockup. Make sure that they are both set OFF in your TNC.
-
- APPENDIX 2. Local Area Network Capability
-
- VHF Packet radio systems can be considered as part of a Local
- Area Network (LAN) in which messages can be left by one station
- in the computer belonging to a second station. At HF the same is
- true, but the area becomes greater. The basic problem here is
- that people can only send and receive messages to or from you
- when you are on-line. To compensate for this, BBS stations were
- developed which allowed both messages and bulletins to be stored
- by anyone for later retrieval.
-
- LAN-LINK allows you to store messages in your computer so as to
- use it as an automatic answering machine. By storing the messages
- in a file called by the name of callsign, with the file extension
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 120
-
-
- '.OUT', anyone connecting to the computer will get their message
- without having to request it. LAN-LINK also extends that concept
- to cover the eventuality of you wanting to take your computer
- off-line for some reason. You may now load the message into any
- other computer you can connect to using elements of the Q code
- adapted to the High Level Network Communications Language (NC/L)
- proposed in my book Software for Amateur Radio, (Book number
- 1560) published by TAB Books, Blue Ridge Summit, Pa. 17214 U.S.A.
-
- A2.1 LAN Protocol (G3ZCZ Version)
-
- The protocol is as follows. When connected to someone who has
- their LAN-LINK configured as a host, if you want to store a
- message you send the following instruction to the other station
- :QSP: <callsign> where <callsign> is the call of the station that
- the message is for, not the callsign of the host station in whose
- computer you are storing the message. [Note use only one space
- character after the :QSP:]. LAN-LINK sends the :QSP: message
- automatically using QSP option in the Message Menu.
-
- For example if you want to store a message for 4Z4ZB in 4X6AA's
- computer which is configured as a Store and Forward system, you
- would first connect to 4X6AA and then send the command as
-
- :QSP: 4Z4ZB .
-
- Better still use :QSP: option in the Lan-Link Menu to automate
- the sequence.
-
- The computer at 4X6AA will respond either with a statement saying
- that it is ready for you to go ahead, or send a message saying
- that it can't comply. If it is ready you get a positive reply
- which will take the form :QRV: <callsign> which if you know the Q
- code, means " I am ready to accept a message for <callsign>".
-
- At this time you may go ahead and send the message. If you type
- the message at the keyboard, you may use either a control Z (^Z)
- character or the character sequence :EOF: followed by a carriage
- return (the ENTER key) to terminate the message. If you have
- first written the message into a text file you may then send it
- using the 'Send File' option of the Files Menu and the
- termination sequence is automatic.
-
- Once you have completed the message, the other (host) computer
- will either reply that the message has been successfully stored
- or give you an error message.
-
- If the message is stored and ready to be sent next time the
- addressee connects to that computer, you will see the message
- :QSL: on your screen. If something went wrong, you will get back
- a negative message taking the form :QNO: followed by a number.
- The number tells you why the operation failed.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 121
-
-
-
- A2.2 Message Format
-
- The message is stored just as if you had left it in your system
- (except that a header is added identifying the time of reception
- and the call of the sending station). It will contain a header
- showing the date and time it was received and your callsign.
- Should a message for that station already be in the system, yours
- will be appended to it. In the event the your upload is aborted,
- the amount of text received before the abort occurred will be
- stored as the message.
-
- When you disconnect from the other LAN-LINK host station, its
- mail beacon will be updated.
-
- Once the message is loaded in the host, it can only be deleted by
- the operator of the host station. When the addressee connects to
- the host and receives the message, the file type will change from
- '.OUT' to '.OLD'. Note QTA stations require positive
- confirmation of receipt of message for the renaming to take
- place.
-
- A2.3 ASCII File Uploading/Downloading
-
- There comes a time when you want to leave a file on your system
- for someone to download later. You can do this by using NC/L to
- control the transfer. You must leave the file in a subdirectory
- defined in the LAN-LINK.SYS FILE called \LAN-LINK\FILES. You must
- first create it if it does not exist. The station who wants the
- message just asks for it using :QBM: <filename>, note they do not
- need to use the full subdirectory path. They must however leave a
- single space character between :QBM: and the filename. In AMTOR
- the Mailbox must be turned on for remote functions.
-
- For example, you have the latest ARRL DX bulletin, and you want
- to pass it on. You could pass it to selected people by copying
- the file to individual messages with the filetype '.OUT', e.g.
- 4X6AA.OUT, 4Z4ZB.OUT or even G3ZCZ.OUT if you want me to get it,
- which wastes a lot of disk space.
-
- On the other hand you could tell people that the file was
- available for downloading, either in the CTEXT connect message
- line which everyone gets when connecting to you by configuring
- LAN-LINK accordingly, or in individual ('.OUT') messages.
-
- If you include the following in your CTEXT message
-
- "ARRLDX.015 now available"
-
- people will know that to download it, they just have to type the
- line ':QBM: ARRLDX.015' (one space character between :QBM: and
- the file name) to get the file. LAN-LINK is not designed as a
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 122
-
-
- BBS, however, if you copy the contents of the \LAN-LINK\FILES
- subdirectory into a file called DIR (USE DIR > DIR in DOS),
- anyone can get a list of the files you have stored in it for
- downloading by typing :QBM: DIR. Since they do not get the real
- directory, just what was in it at the time you copied it into the
- file 'DIR', you may keep "hidden" files in this subdirectory. You
- may thus leave a file for someone to download, tell them that its
- there by leaving them a message (which they will get
- automatically when they connect) and no one else connecting will
- know that it is there.
-
- :QDB: allows you to upload text or ASCII files.
-
- If you use the 'lan-linK' option of the Packet Terminal Menu,
- LAN-LINK will automate the QDB and QBM features for you.
-
- A2.4 Path Determination to a Dx station
-
- If you want to establish a digipeat path to a station somewhat
- out of your direct range, you need to know which of the stations
- that you can connect to can hear that desired DX station. If you
- could get a call monitored (MH list) from the stations that you
- connect to, you would be able to see if the station you are
- connected to has heard your desired DX station.
-
- LAN-LINK uses the :QMH: command to request such a list. When LAN-
- LINK receives a :QMH: command, it drops back to the TNC Command
- Mode and issues a 'MH' command to the TNC (except to a TNC1 which
- does not support it). It stores the list received in a temporary
- buffer, and then returns to the Converse Mode and transmits the
- list back to the station it is linked to.
-
- By judicious use of :QMH: you can determine paths to other
- stations. Note however, that just because one station can hear
- another station, it does not mean that it can work it. For
- example, the station you are connected to may be using a power
- level of 1 watt or so, while the station 200 miles away that it
- heard was using 100 watts. Test the path yourself, or/and leave a
- message asking how reliable the connect path between those two
- stations is.
-
- If you and a small group use a non standard packet channel for
- inter-group communications, you may also use the :QMH: function
- to find out who the station you are connected with, has heard
- recently, when you first sign on the LAN channel.
-
- A2.5 Binary File Transfers
-
- A2.5.1 Introduction
-
- In the PC world most binary file transfers seem to be taking
- place using the YAPP protocol built into the YAPP user
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 123
-
-
- terminal program and the BBS software written by Jeff
- Jacobsen, WA7MBL. As Jeff stated in the documentation, YAPP
- was written to provide a terminal program for use in testing
- the WA7MBL BBS code. However for many radio amateurs, YAPP
- was their first terminal program.
-
- A2.5.2 Transfer of Data
-
- The YAPP binary transfer protocol is similar to the Xmodem
- protocol used on landlines. In order to transmit a file, the
- sending station breaks the file down into blocks of
- characters. Each block is transmitted in sequence. After a
- block has been transmitted, the sending station waits for
- the receiving station to acknowledge that block and verify
- that it was received without errors.
-
- When two stations are alone on a frequency, they can
- transfer data quite quickly. So back in 1986 when YAPP was
- written, it provided the few hams using packet radio with a
- binary file transfer capability. Today, however, the
- situation is different. In most urban areas, each packet
- radio channel is occupied by several stations, and the
- requirements for speedy binary file transfers are somewhat
- different.
-
- A2.5.3 Requirements for Transfer Protocols
-
- The AX.25 protocol provides for a basic verification that
- packets have been received error free. Thus if the binary
- file transfer protocol could start sending blocks, after
- establishing the connection, then keep sending data until
- one of three things happen; the link drops out, the
- receiving station signals that some of the data were
- received with errors in it, or the whole file is
- transmitted.
-
- If the whole file is transmitted, then the sending station
- just has to wait for an acknowledgment from the receiving
- station that the file was received. If the circuit is busy
- with several stations on the channel, or the path goes
- through one or more nodes, there will be varying delays in
- the delivery time of the packets. By not having to
- acknowledge each block of data in the communications
- software running in the PC, the file can get through much
- faster than it would have in the case in which each block
- has to be transmitted and individually acknowledged.
-
- If the link drops out, it would be nice if the computers,
- could determine how much of the file was received, then pick
- up the transmission at that point next time.
-
- If the receiving station signals that some data were
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 124
-
-
- received in error, the sending station should then begin to
- retransmit from the start of the error.
-
- A2.5.4 The Zmodem Protocol
-
- This situation is not unique to the amateur radio packet
- network. It is also present in the commercial packet
- switching environment, and the Zmodem protocol was developed
- to provide the capabilities described above. Zmodem thus
- seems to be an almost ideal binary file transfer protocol
- for use on radio amateur packet channels, and is
- incorporated in LAN-LINK 1.59.
-
- LAN-LINK uses the :QZD: and :QZU: commands to provide the
- capability to remotely download and upload binary files.
- :QZD: allows you to download a file from another station,
- while :QZU: allows you to upload a binary file. :QZD: is
- configured so that if the link drops outs during the
- transfer, when the connection is once again established, a
- subsequent :QZD: for the same filename, will cause the
- transfer to pick up where it left off when the link dropped
- out. This feature is not allowed in the upload :QZU:
- command to inhibit people from injuring files that already
- exist on the other computer. Each command may be initiated
- from either end of the link, but to gain the most from the
- recovery capability, files should be downloaded by the
- receiving station.
-
- A2.5.5 The PCZ Package
-
- LAN-LINK implements the Zmodem protocols using batch files
- in DOS that call up external programs. This approach allows
- stations to try different versions of Zmodem and experiment
- to find the optimal one for their area. LAN-LINK comes with
- the (PCZ) Public Domain implementation of the Zmodem,
- Ymodem, Xmodem, Xmodem-1K and Sealink protocols by Drue
- Kennon and Gary Smith.
-
- A2.5.6 QZ*.BAT Files
-
- While each LAN-LINK user can set up binary file transfer
- batch files to implement any of the protocols, LAN-LINK
- comes with four default batch files for Zmodem which must be
- configured by each user as described in Section 24.3.
-
- As any LAN-LINK station can either receive or originate a
- :QZD: and a :QZU: command, LAN-LINK uses four batch files to
- control Zmodem transfers. These files are as follows.
-
- QZU-RX.BAT Batch file implemented after receipt of :QZU:
- QZU-TX.BAT Batch file implemented after transmission of
- :QZU:
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 125
-
-
- QZD-RX.BAT Batch file implemented after receipt of :QZD:
- QZD-TX.BAT Batch file implemented after transmission of
- :QZD:
-
- Each pair of users can experiment with other protocols and
- Zmodem implementations using the :QZD: and :QZU: commands
- after reading the PCZ documentation. The :QBU: command can
- also be used if the corresponding QBU-RX.BAT and QBU-TX.BAT
- DOS Batch files are created.
-
- A2.5.7 Buffers
-
- LAN-LINK contains an output buffer to store data being
- output to the TNC. The TNC contains a buffer which stores
- data about to be sent on the radio link. In the normal
- course of events, the two buffers fill up so that the Zmodem
- package used by LAN-LINK may think that all the data has
- been transmitted, when in fact there are still characters
- left in the buffers, or the last packet has not yet made it
- to the destination station. In this case, you may see a
- message on your screen that the system has sent all the data
- and is waiting for the final acknowledgement, while at the
- same time you can see from the LEDs on the TNC that you
- still have outgoing data in your system. Have patience and
- wait a while to let the two systems synchronize.
-
- In the event that the link is bad and errors occur, this
- buffering may cause problems which require some of the
- Zmodem timing parameters to be changed. Should this
- situation arise, read the Zmodem package documentation.
-
- A2.5.8 Summary
-
- The flexibility offered by the Zmodem protocol has many
- advantages when used in a packet radio network. LAN-LINK
- 1.59 implements Zmodem by the use of an external public
- domain protocol package which provides for the maximum
- degree of user customization.This capability is provided at
- the cost of having the individual user customize four batch
- files using the text editor built into LAN-LINK.
-
- APPENDIX 3 BASIC NC/L DICTIONARY
-
- Messages can be transferred into any other LAN-LINK computer you
- can connect with using elements of the Q code adapted to the High
- Level Network Communications Language (NC/L) proposed in my book
- Software for Amateur Radio, (Book number 1560) published by TAB
- Books, Blue Ridge Summit, Pa. 17214 U.S.A.
-
- NC/L command words are summarized in the following paragraphs.
- There is no command word to request your message. To receive your
- message, you do nothing, you will receive your mail automatically
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 126
-
-
- when connecting/linking with a LAN-LINK station. You cannot
- normally read messages addressed to another person.
-
- A3.1 :QBM:
-
- To download an ASCII file, send
-
- :QBM: filename.type
-
- The filename.type is the file you want. For example
-
- :QBM: dir
- :QBM: help
- :QBM: LAN-LINK.doc
-
- A3.2 :QDB:
-
- To upload ASCII files to another LAN-LINK system send
-
- :QDB: filename.type
-
- Files will be uploaded into the same sub-directory as LAN-LINK,
- and will have a message header inserted at the top of the file to
- allow the operator to know who uploaded the file. If the operator
- then wants to make the file available for downloading, he or she
- can move it to the \LAN-LINK\FILES sub-directory. The '.TYP'
- following the filename is optional.
-
- If you attempt to upload a file which has the same name as one
- that already exists on the remote system, you will receive an
- 'error' message.
-
- This command is the reverse of :QBM:.
-
- A3.3 :QMH:
-
- To request a call monitored list ('MH') from the LAN-LINK station
- that you are connected with, send
-
- :QMH:
-
- A3.4 :QSM:
-
- To request a repeat of a message from a station using LAN-LINK,
- send
-
- :QSM:
-
- This command will be valid as long as the host station has not
- deleted the <yourcall>.OLD file on his disk. If the file does not
- exist, you will receive a :QNO: 2 'error' response.
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 127
-
-
- A3.5 :QSP:
-
- To leave a message, send
-
- :QSP: callsign
-
- The callsign is that of the station you wish to leave a message
- for.
-
- A3.6 :QRA:
-
- When disconnected, to see what stations (using LAN-LINK 1.53+)
- are on the LAN, or which LAN-LINK stations have messages pending,
- send
-
- :QRA:
-
- All LAN-LINK stations will reply with a mail beacon within a few
- seconds.
-
- A3.7 :QRT:
-
- To shut down an AMTOR/Packet mode Mailbox/beacon station which is
- causing QRM, link or connect to the station and send
-
- :QRT:
-
- A3.8 :QRU:
-
- To upload messages from one LAN-LINK/PK232COM (1.38+) system to
- your computer, send
-
- :QRU:
-
- You may only use the QRU function with stations designated as
- Store and Forward mailboxes. Put a list of stations that you can
- connect to reliably in your <callsign>.MBX file and send it to
- other stations in your LAN also using LAN-LINK. They will then be
- able to dump their mail messages on you and you on them. If they
- do the same and send you their file, then you will be able to
- send messages via them for stations that they can work.
-
- While QRU gives you the capability to bulk upload messages to
- another station in your local area, when you take your machine
- off line, it may also be used to transfer messages between two
- LANs via well sighted gateway digipeaters.
-
- A3.9 :QNO:
-
- ':QNO:' and error message text is a response to a request.
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 128
-
-
-
- A3.10 :QJG: is a response to :QRU:
-
- It confirms that the QRU sequence is complete. There are no more
- messages pending.
-
- A3.11 :QRV: callsign is a response to :QSP: callsign.
-
- The computer is ready to send the message. End the message with a
- control Z (^Z) character, or the sequence :EOF:
-
- A3.12 :QSL: is a response to a command
-
- It confirms receipt of message to that callsign or that a file
- has been successfully uploaded and stored to disk. It is also
- used to acknowledge receipt of a ':QRT:' command.
-
- A3.14 :QTA: message
-
- If LAN-LINK receives :QTA: and a message exists for the
- connecting station, LAN-LINK will change the filetype from 'OUT'
- to 'OLD' and respond with a 'QSL'. If a message does not exist,
- it will respond with a 'QNO'.
-
- A3.14 :QTC: message list
-
- If LAN-LINK receives :QTC: it will respond with the beacon text
- showing the mail queue.
-
- :QTC: precedes a list of callsigns for whom messages are stored
- up on a computer. It is used in Packet Beacon transmissions or
- AMTOR Beacon mode CQ calls.
-
- A3.15 :QBU: External Protocols
-
- This feature is supplied to allow experimentation with external
- protocols.
-
- A3.16 :QZU: Zmodem Binary File Upload.
-
- :QZU: is used to implement an upload of a binary file from
- another station using an external Zmodem protocol via the QZ*.BAT
- files.
-
- A3.17 :QZD: Zmodem Binary File download.
-
- :QZD: is used to implement a remote download of a binary file
- from another station using an external Zmodem protocol via the
- QZ*.BAT files. In the event that the link drops out during the
- transmission, when the link is remade, and the :QZD: retried, the
- transfer will pick up from the point at which it was interrupted,
- if the batch files provided are used.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 129
-
-
-
- PROPOSED EXTENSIONS
-
- A3.18 :QYU: YAPP format file upload.
- A3.19 :QYD: YAPP format file download.
-
- APPENDIX 4. USING OTHER TNCs
-
- The PACKET Mode capabilities can be used on all TNCs. There are
- minor differences in the command dialogue between different TNCs.
- The dialogue differences affecting the operation of LAN-LINK are
- built into the program and set when the TNC type is read from the
- LAN-LINK.SYS file at the program load time. The non packet modes
- will obviously result in error messages if attempted on a packet
- mode only TNC.
-
- The following notes apply to different TNCs or digital
- communications controllers.
-
- A4.1 TNC2 (MFJ 1270) Version 1.1.2
-
- A4.1.1 Default Commands
-
- Rename the LAN-LINK.SYS file as PK232.SYS. Rename the
- TNC2.SYS file as LAN-LINK.SYS and edit it using your word
- processor in its non document mode to customize it to your
- station.
-
- A4.1.2 Program differences
-
- The following functions DO NOT WORK because the TNC does not
- support them.
-
- All NON PACKET modes.
- Software controlled HF/VHF switching.
- Software controlled baudrate switching.
- CQ/BEACON Packet terminal mode.
- TNC Transmit Buffer flush.
-
- A4.2 TNC1 (HD-4040)
-
- The Packet Communications Mode header colors are not supported in
- LAN-LINK for this TNC.
-
- A4.2.1 Default Commands
-
- Rename the LAN-LINK.SYS file as PK232.SYS. Rename the
- TNC1.SYS file as LAN-LINK.SYS and edit it using your word
- processor in its non document mode to customize it to your
- station.
-
- Ignore error messages at start up.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 130
-
-
-
- A4.2.2 Program differences
-
- The following functions DO NOT WORK because the TNC does not
- support them.
-
- All NON PACKET modes.
- Day/Time functions.
- 'MH' and remote :QMH: functions.
- MAIL Packet Terminal Mode.
- CQ/BEACON Packet Terminal Mode.
- TNC Transmit Buffer flush.
- Conference and multiconnect modes.
-
- A4.3 Kaypro KPC-2
-
- The Packet Communications Mode header colors are not supported in
- LAN-LINK for this TNC.
-
- A4.3.1 Default Commands
-
- Rename the LAN-LINK.SYS file as PK232.SYS. Rename the
- KPC.SYS file as LAN-LINK.SYS and edit it using your word
- processor in its non document mode to customize it to your
- station.
-
- A4.3.2 Program differences
-
- The following functions DO NOT WORK because the TNC does not
- support them.
-
- All NON PACKET modes.
- MAIL Packet Terminal Mode.
- CQ/BEACON Packet Terminal Mode.
- TNC Transmit Buffer flush.
-
- A4.4 KAM
-
- LAN-LINK switches colors when it sees the /V or /H following the
- callsign in the packet header, or in the calls monitored ('MH')
- list. If you are monitoring both HF and VHF simultaneously, the
- colors will show you which radio you heard which signal on. If
- the Mail-Snatch or the QTC-Snatch are triggered, LAN-LINK will
- change modes and attempt the connect on the correct radio but
- will not change the band/power information or the logbook to
- reflect that change in the logbook or in the status window dis-
- play.
-
- A4.4.1 Default Commands
-
- Rename the LAN-LINK.SYS file as PK232.SYS. Rename the
- KAM.SYS file as LAN-LINK.SYS and edit it using your word
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 131
-
-
- processor in its non document mode to customize it to your
- station.
-
- A4.4.2 Program differences
-
- The following functions DO NOT WORK because the TNC does not
- support them.
-
- TNC Transmit Buffer flush.
- The SIGNAL Communications Mode.
- The NAVTEX Communications Mode.
- The Alt-D key in the MORSE Communications Mode.
- The AMSAT-OSCAR Menu does not allow UoSAT option, as the KAM
- does not have 1200 baud ASCII capability.
- The BAUDOT NAVY MARS Protocol is also not available.
-
- A4.5 PK-232 EPROM Version 30 DEC 1988 and subsequent ones.
-
- Turn the 'BBS OFF' if you want the Alert Call, packet
- communications mode header colors and Digipeat Detect features to
- work otherwise turn it on.
-
- A4.6 MFJ 1278
-
- LAN-LINK assumes that the Radio 1 port is connected to the
- VHF/UHF packet transceiver, and the Radio 2 port is connected to
- the HF transceiver with the multi mode communications capability.
-
- To transmit CW turn the VOX on.
-
- The MFJ1278 suffers from one major deficiency as far as LAN-LINK
- is concerned. The Echo-As-Sent only works in the AMTOR Communi-
- cations Mode. that means that you will not see the contents of a
- file echo in the incoming window as the file is being transmit-
- ted.
-
- A4.6.1 Default Commands
-
- Rename the LAN-LINK.SYS file as PK232.SYS. Rename the
- MFJ1278.SYS file as LAN-LINK.SYS and edit it using your word
- processor in its non document mode to customize it to your
- station.
-
- A4.6.2 Program differences
-
- The following functions DO NOT WORK because either the TNC
- does not support them or does not do so in a consistent
- manner.
-
- TNC Transmit Buffer flush.
- The SIGNAL Communications Mode.
- The AMSAT-OSCAR Menu does not allow UoSAT option.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 132
-
-
- The BAUDOT NAVY MARS Protocol is not available.
- CW Identification.
-
- The NAVTEX communications mode. (MFJ1278 allows, but not set
- in LAN-LINK).
-
- A4.7 Heath HK-21
-
- K3WGF noticed that his Heath HK-21 TNC didn't seem to have the
- proper circuitry to support true DCD on pin 8 of the RS232
- connector. Even though the pin was labeled DCD it didn't signal
- properly. Set the DCD function in LAN-LINK to OFF to make the
- Capture-to-Disk close out normally rather than continue to remain
- engaged.
-
- A4.8 PK 87/88
-
- Use the same LAN-LINK.SYS file as for a PK-232 and ignore the non
- packet communications modes and functions.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 133
-
-
- APPENDIX 5 UPDATES/REVISION HISTORY
-
- 1.56 RTTY and Navy Mars File transfer bug fixed. Command Echo bug
- fixed. Disconnect Capture-to-Disk bug fixed. Alt-K and Alt-Y
- added. :QBU: added. J option in parameter menu deleted, I
- and L options added. BBS Bulletin read command customizable.
- Automatic packet/AMTOR contest mode added. Callsigns
- converted to upper case. CW speed shown in status window,
- left/right arrows change CW speed by 1 wpm. Sound flag kills
- ^G bell on incoming text. /EX or /ex as well as :EOF: can
- now be used in *.bbs file column 1. 'RY's deleted from RTTY
- CQ call. PC to TNC now uses hardware handshake (^S/^Q
- deleted). SAREX Orbiter menu/functions changed. SAREX
- Orbiter Metabeacon interface changed. Logs split to HF and
- VHF. PacketCluster added. Update changed.
-
- 1.57 dBASE compatible logbook files. AutoCQ bug, 1.56 Non KAM vhf
- PACLEN bug, Packet 'End' key bug and Editor F10 bug fixed,
- changes in order of colors in SYS file. K option added to
- Edit menu. ! F and 0 options added in Parameters Menu. PK-
- 232 Mailbox commands changed at start-up and shut-down. QSM
- added to LAN-LINK Menu. Com 3/4 addresses/IRQs changed from
- PS-2 to XT. Capture-to-disk files automatically named each
- day as YYMMDD.RUN. Quick Menu added. Kam/KPC Shut-down state
- 4/5 turns PBMON and NDMON off.
-
- 1.58 Default users added. Editor stack/ 1.57 lockout bug and
- other anomalies fixed, X and Y options added to TNC Menu. O,
- P, Y and Z options added to Files Menu. Pick option added to
- message Menu. Com port set up changed. Multi-user operations
- changed. :QTA: Added.
-
- 1.59 F10, First menu character, RTTY/CW file transfer and QBU
- transparent mode bugs fixed. QTA ack, left/right arrows in
- log prompt, Local time display, QZU/QZD Zmodem, Metabeacon
- in packet, MCON control in SAREX Mode, L option in Edit
- menu, ! in Call menu, K and N in Log Menu, and Z in SAREX
- Menu added. B removed from call menu. Alt-Y now does RY's in
- RTTY. XMITOK ON/OFF toggle in PK-232 CW mode. Scrollback not
- written to capture file.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 134
-
-
- APPENDIX 6 LAN-LINK 1.59 REGISTRATION FORM
-
- To: Joe Kasser G3ZCZ, P O BOX 3419, SILVER SPRING, MD 20918.
-
- CALL ________________ TODAY'S DATE _____________
- NAME ______________________________________________
- ADDRESS ___________________________________________
- ___________________________________________
- CITY ___________________________________________
- STATE _________ POSTCODE ____________ TELEPHONE ____________
- TNC TYPE _________ FIRMWARE REV __________ HOME BBS ___________
- DISK SIZE 5.25 _____ 3.5 ____ Other ? _____________
-
- I enclose a check for $35.00. Please register me as a user of
- LAN-LINK. I am currently using Version ______ which I obtained
- from _________________________________________. Please send me
- the latest version of LAN-LINK or if a more recent one does not
- exist at this time, QSL my registration and add my name to the
- list to receive a free update when it becomes available.
-
- I also enclose an additional $___ for evaluation copies of WHATS-
- UP _, PC-HAM _ and Startrek TCP _ ($5 for 1 program, $10.00 for
- the set). If I like them, I plan to register them in due course.
-
- Signature
-
- My favorite operating modes are ______________________________.
-
- Additional Features I'd like to see in future releases of LAN-
- LINK.
-
- Keep Conference Bridge Up __ YAPP Binary File compatibility __
- Expanded Contest Operation __ More AMTOR (explain below) __
- NTS capability __ Picture Transfer capability __
- Telephone Modem capability __ PacketCluster Menu (Like BBS) __
- Kenwood Radio Control Menu __ Printed Manual ($15.00) __
- Dumb Terminal (CP-1, ST-5 etc.) Baudot/ASCII RTTY operation __
-
- NOTE: some additions come into LAN-LINK as a result of user
- suggestions, so here's your chance to get some input in.
-
- Comments, likes, dislikes, wish list, etc.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 135
-
-
- APPENDIX 7 LAN-LINK PROBLEM REPORT
-
- Name ______________________________________ CALL _______________
- Street __________________________________________________________
- City _______________________________ State _____ ZIP __________
- Tel. ____________________ LAN-LINK version ____
-
- 1. Describe your computer system.
-
- Manufacturer ____________________ Model ___________TNC __________
- Firmware _____
-
- DOS Version ________________ Clock Frequency _________ MHz.
-
- List peripheral equipment and cards installed in your computer.
-
- Video Herc/EGA/CGA_____ _______________________
- _______________________ _______________________
- _______________________ _______________________
-
- What memory resident programs were installed when the problem
- occurred?
- _______________________ _______________________
- _______________________ _______________________
-
- 2. Describe the problem in detail. What were the Misc. flag
- state-sequence numbers when the problem was happening?
-
-
- 3. Describe the sequence of events or keystrokes that led to the
- problem.
-
- 4. Any other information that may help in locating the problem.
-
-
- Use additional sheets of paper if necessary. ATTACH a copy of
- your LAN-LINK.SYS file.
-
- Mail to: Joe Kasser, P O Box 3419, Silver Spring, MD. 20918.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 136
-
-
- APPENDIX 8 Other PC Software by Joe Kasser G3ZCZ
-
- 8.1 PC-HAM 3.52 BY G3ZCZ
-
- LOGBOOK
-
- Full blown logging package. With automatic check of logs for
- awards such as DXCC. Allows you to recall any entry by call sign
- within seconds. Indexed displays, QSL'ing, Contest mode QSL'ing
- (prints the lot) and lots more. Although written in dBASE3 the
- package contains a compiled version (LOGBOOK.EXE), so you don't
- need dBASE to run it. The source code is ONLY given to registered
- users. It can convert your exported LAN-LINK.LOG file to LAN-
- LINK.DBF to put this package to work. Ideal for DX-peditions or
- for DX robot users to handle QSLing and log statistics.
-
- CONTEST
-
- Keeps Dupes in memory, logs QSO's to disk in format which can be
- processed by the LOGBOOK package. Now compiled in Turbo BASIC,
- source code is supplied so that you can modify the program to
- meet your requirements.
-
- CQSS
-
- Sweepstakes game compiled in Turbo BASIC. Work the ARRL
- Sweepstakes contest on your computer. You are located just
- outside Washington DC. A propagation model is built in to the
- program. This program is REQUIRED training for all sweepstakes
- operators. Earlier version of the program is described in detail
- in 'Software for Amateur Radio' by Joe Kasser G3ZCZ, published by
- TAB Books, Blue Ridge Summit, PA. 17214.
-
- WHATSON
-
- Predict HF Propagation for given days. Contest mode with printout
- to whole world at hourly intervals. Needs BASIC.
-
- This software AND MORE comprises PC-HAM which is available as
- Shareware from G3ZCZ. Send a blank formatted disk, SASE, and a
- QSL card for a copy or save time and money and register as a user
- for $36.50 (half of $73). Request PC-HAM and specify disk size
- (3.5 or 5.25 inches).
-
-
- 8.2 STARTREK The Computer Program
-
- An ideal task for the beginner to learn a language on is a
- simulation game which is written around the computer that the
- beginner has available. For in that case, there is complete
- control of all inputs and outputs, This kind of game in which the
- player makes decisions based on the information available to him
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 137
-
-
- or her available at the time), can be made sufficiently
- sophisticated and complex so as to make writing it an adequate
- challenge for anybody.
-
- The techniques used in writing a good game are the same that
- programmers use in professional activities. Writing a good game
- poses a challenge that allows you to develop good habits and
- techniques for programming and also allows you to learn a
- language in an interesting manner. By taking an orderly approach
- to the game design, complex operations may be clearly understood
- and converted to computer code with the aid of a language
- reference manual, irrespective of the language being used.
-
- This product teaches the techniques for writing such a game using
- the STARTREK game as an example, and the BASIC language as the
- programming language in which to write the code.
-
- Registration fees.
-
- Single Copy $15.00
- 10 - 50 Copies $12.00 per registered copy.
- 50 - 100 Copies $10.00 per registered copy.
- 100 + Copies $8.00 per registered copy.
-
- This is available as Shareware from G3ZCZ. Send a blank formatted
- disk and an SASE for a copy or save time and money and register
- as a user by sending a check for the registration fee according
- the schedule posted above. Request Startrek - The Computer
- Program and specify disk size (3.5 or 5.25 inches).
-
- 8.3 WHATS-UP 1.00
-
- WHATS-UP is a tool for experimenting with orbital dynamics and
- Telemetry Decoding and display Program for the UoSAT-OSCAR 11,
- AMSAT-OSCAR 13, Fuji-OSCAR 20 and the AMSAT Microsat Spacecraft
- (OSCARs 16, 17, 18 and 19). It is table driven via the
- configuration files to allow maximum flexibility.
-
- WHATS-UP contains the following features:
-
- * Can automatically set Kenwood Radios to spacecraft beacon
- frequency when satellite comes over your horizon.
- * Can automatically read the frequency from Kenwood Radios to a
- disk file for Doppler frequency measurements.
- * Can automatically configure a PK-232 for each spacecraft data
- format.
- * Reads 2 Line and AMSAT format orbit element data files.
- * Provides antenna azimuth and elevation pointing data.
- * Real time, Playback and Dumb Terminal mode.
- * Automatic Capture-to-disk of raw telemetry.
- * Extracts telemetry channel data to a database or spreadsheet
- readable file for further analysis.
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 138
-
-
- * Link quality measurement on packet telemetry.
- * Capability to print the raw telemetry as it is received.
- * Up to 16 user configurable display pages (screens). You set the
- position on the page (width of engineering unit field, and
- number of decimal places) that a parameter is displayed at.
- * Wild card page (parameter shows up on all pages).
- * Selectable display of Engineering units or raw byte for each
- display page.
- * Display of raw packets (i.e. STATUS)
- * Color changes if a parameter value changed between successive
- frames.
- * Audio and visual alarms if a telemetry value exceeds, falls
- below or falls outside a preset limit value(s).
- * Dumb split screen terminal mode (a la LAN-LINK).
- * Customizable colors, PC to TNC baud rate, data parity and stop
- bits.
- * Default spacecraft configuration files.
- * Time of day clock display (in HH:MM:SS format)
-
- Real time analysis requires a receiver and demodulator. Analysis
- of playback data can be performed with just the computer and
- WHATS-UP.
-
- If you would like a copy of WHATS-UP and have captured any
- telemetry to disk, especially daytime or southern hemisphere
- passes, please put them on a disk and send it in with your
- request, a mailer and return postage. Don't let the individual
- data files become too long. I suggest that you rename them every
- day in the format YYMMDD.SC, such as 900824.D17, 900824.F20, etc.
-
- IF YOU ARE INTERESTED IN OSCAR AND SPACECRAFT TELEMETRY, THEN
- THIS PROGRAM IS A MUST.
-
- Suggestions for improvements and additions are always welcome.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 139
-
-
- APPENDIX 9 HOW SHAREWARE WORKS:
-
- The Association of Shareware Professionals (ASP) has established
- standards for its members and for any organization which has "ASP
- Approved" status. The ASP wants to make sure the shareware
- principle works for you. If you are unable to resolve a problem
- with an ASP member or organization (other than technical
- support), the ASP may be able to help. Please write to
-
- The ASP Ombudsman, 545 Grover road, Muskegon, MI. 49442-9427,
- USA.
-
- You are encouraged to copy the floppy disk and share it freely
- with others. You have the luxury of trying out the product at
- your own pace and in the comfort of your own home or workplace.
-
- After you have used the material for a reasonable evaluation
- period (30 days), you should either discontinue use of the
- material or register your copy. Your support is important and
- greatly appreciated. With it, Shareware authors are encouraged to
- design and distribute new products. Without it, a great deal of
- high quality, low cost software will cease to be available.
-
- Why pay at all?
-
- * You receive support from the author.
- * You receive a CURRENT copy of the program.
- * Your input and ideas help shape future products.
- * A sense of pride and ownership in having honestly participated
- in the Shareware revolution.
- * You help to keep software prices down by supporting a
- distribution method which doesn't depend on expensive
- advertising campaigns.
-
- Be aware of the following restrictions, designed to protect the
- community of Shareware users and to prevent greedy people from
- taking unfair advantage of the trust, hard work and good will of
- Shareware authors.
-
- 1. No price or consideration may be charged for the material.
- However, a distribution cost may be charged for the cost of
- the diskettes, shipping and handling, not to exceed $6.
-
- 2. The files and programs on the disks may not be modified or
- deleted.
-
- 3. The material cannot be sold as part of some other more
- inclusive package.
-
- 4. The material cannot be "rented" or "leased" to others.
-
- 5. The end user must be told clearly in writing on the outside of
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK VERSION 1.59 PAGE 140
-
-
- the package and in all advertising that the diskette(s) are
- "Shareware."
-
- 6. The package must contain a written explanation that the disk
- is for evaluation purposes, and that an additional
- "registration fee" is expected by the author, if the material
- is used beyond an initial evaluation period.
-
- 7. In the case of distribution via any telecommunications link,
- the following must be done:
-
- An error checking protocol must be used.
-
- The individual files must be combined into, and transferred in
- a library or archive format.
-
- 8. Shareware distribution is permitted only in the United States,
- Canada, England, and Australia.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 141
-
-
- Accepts, 1
- Accordance, 57
- ACHG, 8, 95
- Ack, 133
- Acknowledgement, 125
- Acknowledgment, 123
- Adjusted, 81
- Adopt, 11
- Advantages, 125
- Alarm, 3, 27, 33, 46, 47, 83, 96
- Alarmwindow, 6, 83
- ALFD, 87
- ALIST, 7, 88, 89
- Alt-A, 4, 8, 54, 55, 57, 103
- Alt-B, 8, 103
- Alt-C, 8, 18, 24, 92, 103
- Alt-D, 8, 20, 45, 71, 88, 89, 100, 103, 131
- Alt-E, 4, 8, 24, 54, 55, 57, 103
- Alt-F, 4, 8, 28, 54, 55, 58, 103, 112
- Alt-J, 8, 103
- Alt-K, 8, 104, 133
- Alt-L, 8, 74, 104
- Alt-M, 8, 72, 104, 115
- Alt-N, 8, 92, 104
- Alt-O, 8, 19, 20, 65, 74, 104
- Alt-P, 8, 104
- Alt-Q, 8, 20, 32, 105
- Alt-R, 8, 38, 105
- Alt-S, 4, 8, 55, 74, 105
- Alt-U, 4, 55
- Alt-X, 8, 17, 18, 58, 105
- Alt-Y, 8, 105, 133
- Alt-Z, 4, 8, 40, 55, 56, 105
- Amateurs, 1, 123
- AMSAT-OSCAR, 5, 14, 30, 62, 63, 65, 131, 137
- AMTOR, 2, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, 27, 28,
- 29, 33, 34, 37, 38, 47, 52, 54, 69, 70, 74, 76, 77, 84, 88, 89,
- 95, 96, 101, 103, 104, 105, 107, 114, 116, 117, 121, 127, 128,
- 131, 133, 134
- AMTOR-FEC, 22
- Antenna, 137
- APPENDIX, 10, 11, 17, 21, 50, 51, 53, 117, 119, 125, 129, 133, 134,
- 135, 136, 139
- Applies, 17
- Areas, 123
- Arise, 125
- ARQ, 3, 8, 27, 33, 34, 89, 95, 96, 101, 103
- Arrow, 4, 9, 22, 55, 56, 106, 107
- Arrows, 32, 106, 107, 133
- ASCII, 2, 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 21, 22, 42, 49, 50, 51,
- 52, 62, 63, 88, 98, 101, 106, 107, 110, 111, 112, 113, 115, 121,
- 122, 126, 131, 134
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 142
-
-
- Attack, 5, 63, 65
- AUTO-Upload, 111
- AutoCQ, 22, 114, 133
- Automatic, 2, 5, 13, 14, 15, 19, 20, 21, 24, 27, 28, 31, 39, 47,
- 54, 64, 69, 74, 75, 87, 94, 98, 99, 104, 115, 119, 120, 133, 136,
- 137
- Automatically, 13, 14, 16, 24, 25, 34, 40, 49, 50, 53, 54, 55, 58,
- 71, 77, 92, 107, 109, 113, 114, 120, 122, 125, 133, 137
- Autumn, 81
- AX, 123
- Azimuth, 137
-
- Banks, 1
- Batteries, 17, 61, 119
- Battery, 16, 17, 61, 62
- Baud, 6, 7, 8, 16, 17, 21, 63, 71, 81, 82, 88, 89, 90, 96, 97, 98,
- 99, 107, 108, 113, 118, 119, 131, 138
- BAUDOT, 2, 7, 8, 12, 13, 15, 22, 63, 87, 88, 96, 101, 106, 107, 131,
- 132, 134
- Baudrate, 9, 22, 107, 129
- BBS, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 14, 18, 21, 24, 25, 30, 32, 33, 38,
- 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 59, 62, 64, 67, 68, 74, 75, 76,
- 80, 86, 87, 90, 102, 105, 107, 108, 111, 119, 122, 123, 131, 133,
- 134
- Beacon, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 23, 27, 33, 34, 39, 40, 41, 45,
- 54, 62, 63, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 75, 76, 87, 90, 94, 95,
- 109, 114, 115, 116, 117, 121, 127, 128, 129, 130, 137
- Beep, 5, 68, 70, 71, 109
- Behind, 81
- Bell, 48, 63, 133
- BIT, 11, 20, 21, 82
- Bits, 6, 82, 108, 119, 138
- Blink, 27, 64
- Blocks, 123
- BottomWindow, 6, 83
- Breaks, 123
- Bridge, 7, 14, 24, 90, 93, 94, 134
- BTEXT, 71, 114
- Buffer, 2, 5, 8, 10, 13, 20, 28, 29, 32, 48, 60, 61, 69, 80, 93,
- 101, 102, 103, 106, 117, 122, 125, 129, 130, 131
- Buffering, 125
- Bug, 21, 133
- Bugs, 10, 117, 133
- Bulletin, 22, 62, 76, 86, 121, 133
- Bulletins, 14, 25, 44, 62, 76, 86, 90, 119
-
- Call, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 14, 15, 18, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, 26, 27,
- 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37, 38, 39, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 54, 55,
- 57, 58, 63, 64, 65, 66, 69, 70, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 84, 89,
- 90, 92, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 101, 103, 104, 105, 108, 109, 110,
- 113, 116, 118, 120, 121, 122, 124, 126, 131, 133, 134, 135, 136
- Calls, 5, 6, 23, 24, 26, 27, 28, 32, 34, 39, 41, 58, 59, 60, 61,
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 143
-
-
- 66, 67, 68, 74, 75, 76, 77, 83, 87, 93, 96, 100, 103, 104, 109,
- 114, 115, 117, 128, 130
- Callsign, 2, 5, 6, 7, 14, 16, 20, 21, 23, 24, 26, 27, 32, 33, 34,
- 35, 37, 38, 39, 45, 49, 51, 52, 55, 58, 59, 60, 64, 71, 72, 73,
- 74, 75, 76, 77, 86, 90, 91, 94, 96, 98, 99, 105, 108, 109, 111,
- 112, 114, 115, 117, 119, 120, 121, 127, 128, 130
- Callsigns, 5, 59, 68, 74, 76, 128, 133
- Capture-to-Disk, 3, 5, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 44, 45, 46, 49, 65, 68,
- 69, 75, 86, 98, 99, 106, 109, 132, 133, 137
- CFROM, 79, 80, 100
- CGA, 10, 117, 135
- Character, 13, 17, 18, 26, 27, 29, 32, 37, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 48,
- 49, 50, 52, 53, 54, 56, 59, 64, 65, 66, 72, 73, 75, 82, 87, 92,
- 93, 94, 98, 109, 110, 111, 115, 117, 119, 120, 121, 128, 133
- Chatham, 1
- Checks, 1
- Chime, 35, 73
- CHIRPCOPY, 7, 15, 28, 88, 89
- Circuit, 123
- CIS, 1
- Clocks, 81
- CMD, 2, 26, 28, 117
- CMSG, 20, 66, 67, 69, 80
- Coast, 81
- Collect, 24
- Color, 6, 7, 15, 24, 82, 83, 84, 85, 91, 92, 138
- Colors, 6, 14, 16, 19, 68, 82, 85, 104, 109, 117, 129, 130, 131,
- 133, 138
- Column, 55, 110, 133
- Comercial, 11
- Command, 5, 10, 12, 14, 15, 18, 19, 20, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 32, 35,
- 36, 37, 38, 40, 41, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 55, 58, 59, 60, 61,
- 62, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 84, 87,
- 91, 93, 97, 98, 99, 100, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 111, 112, 113,
- 114, 117, 118, 120, 122, 124, 125, 126, 128, 129, 133
- Commands, 10, 11, 12, 16, 21, 39, 41, 42, 43, 62, 66, 67, 68, 70,
- 107, 108, 109, 117, 119, 124, 125, 129, 130, 131, 133
- Comments, 41, 54, 55, 59, 109, 134
- Common, 6, 25, 68, 77, 100, 109, 118
- Compress, 25
- Compuserve, 1, 11
- Computers, 123
- Conference, 7, 10, 14, 24, 38, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 117, 118, 130,
- 134
- CONFIG, 9, 107, 110
- Configuration, 2, 12, 14, 17, 18, 19, 20, 36, 45, 51, 61, 63, 64,
- 65, 77, 86, 89, 92, 108, 118, 119, 137, 138
- Connect, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 14, 15, 18, 21, 23, 24, 26, 27, 30, 31,
- 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 40, 41, 46, 47, 49, 53, 54, 60, 61,
- 63, 64, 67, 68, 70, 71, 72, 74, 79, 80, 91, 92, 93, 96, 100, 101,
- 103, 104, 105, 109, 110, 112, 114, 115, 116, 118, 120, 121, 122,
- 125, 127, 130
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 144
-
-
- Connected, 6, 10, 13, 14, 22, 23, 24, 30, 32, 35, 36, 40, 50, 52,
- 65, 68, 71, 72, 74, 76, 80, 84, 85, 90, 91, 92, 94, 105, 111, 118,
- 120, 122, 126, 131
- CONOK, 67, 79, 80
- Contest, 2, 3, 5, 6, 13, 15, 19, 20, 22, 46, 47, 58, 68, 73, 74,
- 79, 104, 133, 134, 136
- Control-C, 43
- Control-F, 112
- Control-Q, 119
- Control-S, 119
- Control-Z, 9, 107
- Convenient, 62
- CONVERSE, 2, 10, 12, 28, 29, 51, 53, 61, 72, 93, 95, 117, 122
- Copy, 1, 16, 24, 27, 39, 43, 62, 95, 97, 98, 99, 115, 122, 135, 136,
- 137, 138, 139
- Couple, 11
- CP, 134
- CQ, 2, 3, 6, 7, 10, 15, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, 27, 28, 31, 33, 38, 39,
- 60, 69, 78, 79, 90, 91, 94, 96, 98, 103, 108, 114, 116, 117, 128,
- 129, 130, 133
- CQTEXT, 78
- Creating, 43
- Credit, 1
- Ctdsk, 3, 4, 42, 44, 48, 49, 68
- CTEXT, 5, 6, 20, 60, 62, 66, 67, 69, 79, 80, 121
- Ctrl-Z, 9
- Customize, 17, 19, 76, 79, 81, 82, 100, 125, 129, 130, 131
- CW, 7, 8, 88, 89, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 107, 131, 132, 133
- CWID, 96
-
- Dansey, 1
- DBF, 6, 9, 24, 54, 57, 59, 78, 109, 136
- DCD, 5, 68, 74, 93, 108, 118, 132
- DCD-Flag, 118
- Deactivate, 5, 60, 62
- Defaults, 14, 16, 21, 61, 109
- Definatly, 11
- Degree, 125
- Delivery, 123
- Demodulator, 138
- Digipeat, 5, 14, 23, 35, 38, 68, 70, 76, 77, 91, 108, 109, 122, 131
- Digipeated, 33, 70, 72
- Digipeater, 35, 72, 76, 79, 100
- Digipeaters, 35, 127
- DIR, 6, 9, 14, 18, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 44, 72, 74, 78, 107, 109,
- 110, 122, 126
- Directories, 6, 68, 77, 92
- Directory, 3, 6, 15, 29, 30, 33, 34, 36, 38, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50,
- 59, 72, 77, 78, 108, 109, 114, 122
- DISCONNECTED, 10, 33, 38, 39, 65, 71, 74, 91, 118, 119, 127
- Display, 3, 14, 23, 26, 27, 38, 46, 47, 50, 54, 56, 57, 58, 61, 65,
- 70, 72, 74, 79, 82, 86, 89, 91, 101, 104, 106, 109, 118, 119, 130,
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 145
-
-
- 133, 137, 138
- Displayed, 17, 21, 22, 23, 24, 29, 33, 44, 45, 55, 58, 64, 69, 70,
- 73, 79, 87, 90, 97, 98, 99, 106, 107, 138
- Displaying, 23, 98
- Displays, 19, 21, 24, 38, 39, 58, 70, 86, 88, 106, 136
- DL, 1
- Domain, 124, 125
- Doppler, 137
- Downlink, 36
- Download, 3, 6, 10, 14, 32, 40, 41, 50, 51, 53, 77, 78, 96, 108,
- 114, 121, 122, 124, 126, 128, 129
- Drawn, 1
- Drue, 124
- DUPLEX, 12, 13
- Dynamics, 137
-
- EAS, 109
- East, 81
- EAX, 36, 110
- Echo, 5, 25, 27, 68, 70, 84, 109, 131, 133
- Echo-As-Sent, 131
- Edit, 3, 4, 8, 14, 19, 20, 25, 30, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50, 54,
- 55, 56, 57, 62, 65, 77, 101, 104, 108, 112, 129, 130, 131, 133
- Editor, 14, 20, 25, 42, 44, 65, 94, 110, 114, 115, 125, 133
- EGA, 135
- Electronically, 25
- Element, 137
- Elevation, 137
- Embed, 43
- End, 4, 8, 13, 14, 20, 26, 32, 37, 41, 43, 44, 47, 55, 56, 65, 72,
- 74, 76, 94, 105, 106, 107, 109, 117, 124, 128, 133, 139
- Enter, 3, 6, 8, 13, 19, 26, 27, 28, 32, 33, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41,
- 42, 43, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 52, 53, 55, 57, 58, 59, 62, 67, 68,
- 73, 74, 77, 82, 89, 90, 92, 93, 97, 99, 101, 103, 104, 108, 120
- Environment, 124
- EOF, 41, 44, 52, 107, 111, 112, 120, 128, 133
- Erase, 3, 48
- Error, 12, 17, 18, 20, 32, 51, 72, 73, 83, 93, 117, 120, 123, 124,
- 126, 127, 129, 140
- Errors, 118, 123, 125
- Escape, 18, 30, 54, 55
- EST, 17, 81
- Establishing, 123
- Eurocard, 1
- European, 1
- Events, 10, 46, 118, 125, 135
- Exercise, 49, 59
- Experiment, 63, 124, 125
- Experimenting, 137
- Explicit, 113
-
- FAX, 1
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 146
-
-
- Features, 5, 9, 12, 15, 18, 44, 46, 50, 65, 70, 92, 110, 114, 122,
- 131, 134, 137
- FEC, 2, 8, 10, 15, 27, 28, 29, 38, 95, 96, 101, 103, 105, 117
- Files, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 14, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 23, 24, 25, 29, 30,
- 31, 32, 40, 42, 44, 45, 46, 48, 49, 50, 51, 53, 54, 56, 59, 60,
- 65, 69, 70, 71, 77, 81, 82, 87, 94, 107, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113,
- 114, 115, 120, 121, 122, 124, 125, 126, 128, 133, 137, 138, 139,
- 140
- Filetype, 19, 57, 115, 121, 128
- Final, 125
- Fine, 112
- Firmware, 19, 134, 135
- Flashing, 21, 22, 23, 24, 33, 38, 39, 65, 70, 73, 86, 106
- Forwarding, 62
- FOUR, 17, 53, 113, 124, 125
- FSK, 107
- Function, 2, 4, 12, 13, 14, 15, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32,
- 37, 38, 39, 44, 45, 50, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 61, 65, 68, 70, 71,
- 74, 75, 89, 93, 95, 98, 99, 101, 103, 104, 105, 106, 109, 111,
- 112, 117, 122, 127, 132
-
- Gain, 124
- Gary, 124
- Gateway, 127
- Greek, 10, 17, 82, 119
- Grover, 139
-
- Handshake, 18, 70, 109, 133
- Happened, 53
- Hassles, 62
- Header, 6, 14, 33, 39, 45, 60, 64, 75, 84, 94, 115, 121, 126, 129,
- 130, 131
- HEADERLN, 109
- Headers, 19, 23, 25, 33, 39, 40, 64, 76, 90, 109
- Hercules, 117
- HF, 2, 6, 7, 9, 12, 19, 24, 34, 54, 69, 78, 84, 87, 88, 92, 93, 108,
- 109, 110, 119, 129, 130, 131, 133, 136
- Highlight, 56, 57
- Highlighted, 54, 55, 57
- Hobby, 11
- Horizon, 137
- Hours, 81
-
- Implement, 124, 128
- Implementation, 124
- Implementations, 113, 125
- Implements, 124, 125
- Includes, 1
- Incompatible, 17
- Indicator, 14, 23, 27, 70, 73
- Individually, 123
- Inhibit, 124
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 147
-
-
- Inhibitor, 39
- Injuring, 124
- Inserting, 65, 94
- INTERESTED, 138
- Interfaced, 113
- Intermittent, 10, 117, 119
- Interpretation, 11
- Interrogate, 62
- Interrupted, 53, 128
- InWindow, 6, 71, 83, 91
- IRQ, 81
- IRQs, 133
-
- Jacobsen, 123
- Jeff, 123
-
- KA-Node, 36, 109, 110
- KA-Nodes, 36
- KAM, 1, 11, 12, 18, 19, 20, 28, 62, 63, 74, 77, 82, 88, 90, 92, 97,
- 99, 109, 117, 130, 131, 133
- Kaypro, 10, 130
- KBytes, 24, 65
- Kennon, 124
- Kent, 1
- Kenwood, 134, 137
- KM, 41
- KN, 74, 106
- KPC, 1, 10, 61, 130, 133
-
- Label, 25
- Labeled, 132
- LAMTOR, 95
- LAN, 10, 14, 15, 19, 21, 24, 25, 26, 29, 34, 45, 46, 51, 52, 53,
- 57, 60, 63, 66, 69, 72, 74, 76, 79, 98, 99, 110, 112, 118, 119,
- 120, 122, 127
- LAN-LINK, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 11, 12, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21,
- 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
- 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 57,
- 58, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75,
- 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95,
- 96, 98, 99, 100, 104, 107, 108, 109, 110, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116,
- 117, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 124, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 130,
- 131, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136, 138
- Landline, 11
- Landlines, 123
- LEDs, 125
- Left, 21, 29, 40, 42, 43, 45, 51, 82, 87, 106, 107, 114, 115, 119,
- 121, 124, 125, 133
- Link, 5, 13, 19, 20, 21, 23, 26, 28, 29, 32, 34, 35, 36, 45, 46,
- 51, 52, 53, 57, 66, 68, 69, 71, 72, 74, 79, 88, 93, 98, 99, 102,
- 107, 108, 112, 113, 114, 117, 119, 123, 124, 125, 127, 128, 138,
- 140
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 148
-
-
- Listing, 58
- Little, 105
- LM, 40, 41, 112
- LOCAL-BBS, 45, 46, 62, 111
- Lockout, 64, 133
- Lockup, 10, 119
- Log-to-disk, 68
- Logbook, 6, 13, 24, 31, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 69, 78, 101, 109,
- 130, 133, 136
- LogWindow, 6, 83
- Ltd, 1
-
- Mail, 1, 3, 7, 8, 9, 14, 22, 23, 24, 33, 39, 40, 41, 42, 52, 62,
- 70, 71, 74, 75, 76, 80, 87, 89, 90, 91, 95, 100, 108, 114, 115,
- 116, 121, 125, 127, 128, 130, 135
- Mail-Snatch, 5, 39, 76, 130
- Mailbox, 5, 8, 9, 13, 14, 15, 27, 60, 62, 69, 95, 96, 107, 110, 114,
- 116, 117, 121, 127, 133
- Mailer, 25, 138
- Manufacturers, 11
- MARS, 7, 8, 16, 22, 87, 96, 97, 131, 132, 133
- MasterCard, 1
- Matter, 11
- MBX, 9, 17, 52, 90, 100, 107, 110, 111, 127
- MCON, 133
- Measurements, 137
- Menu, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18, 20, 21, 27, 28, 30,
- 31, 32, 33, 42, 44, 46, 48, 49, 50, 54, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 62,
- 63, 65, 66, 67, 68, 72, 76, 81, 83, 84, 86, 87, 88, 89, 92, 95,
- 96, 98, 99, 103, 104, 105, 106, 108, 109, 110, 112, 117, 118, 120,
- 122, 131, 133, 134
- Menus, 12, 25, 30, 83, 117
- Message, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 20, 21, 30, 32,
- 36, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 48, 50, 51, 52, 53, 59, 60, 62,
- 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 78, 80, 82, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97,
- 101, 104, 107, 108, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 117, 119, 120, 121,
- 122, 125, 126, 127, 128, 133
- META, 65, 66, 67, 68
- Metabeacon, 7, 65, 66, 67, 90, 94, 133
- METEORSCATTER, 69
- MFILTER, 119
- MFJ, 1, 10, 11, 12, 18, 28, 62, 63, 77, 82, 129, 131, 132
- MH, 26, 68, 83, 122, 126, 130
- MHWindow, 6, 83
- MI, 139
- MIR, 63
- Mode, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21,
- 22, 23, 24, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 40,
- 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 48, 49, 51, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 60, 61,
- 62, 63, 64, 65, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 76, 77, 79, 80,
- 81, 84, 85, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99,
- 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 110, 111, 114, 116,
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 149
-
-
- 117, 118, 122, 127, 128, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 136, 137, 138
- Morse, 2, 7, 8, 12, 13, 15, 21, 22, 27, 88, 96, 98, 99, 100, 103,
- 106, 131
- MRPT, 33
- Multi-user, 39, 41, 91, 133
- Muskegon, 139
- MYCALL, 96, 98, 99
-
- Nature, 11
- NAVTEX, 7, 22, 88, 89, 131, 132
- NDMON, 133
- NET, 14, 34, 35, 36, 38, 71, 109, 110, 112, 119
- Nice, 123
- NNNN, 97, 98, 99
- NODE, 5, 12, 14, 18, 34, 35, 36, 68, 71, 108
- NTS, 41, 134
-
- Obtain, 1
- Occupied, 123
- Office, 11
- Offset, 6, 17, 81, 108
- Orbital, 137
- Originate, 113, 124
- OSCAR, 138
- Outs, 124
- OutWindow, 6, 48, 83, 117
- Overwriting, 53
-
- Packet, 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23,
- 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 37, 38, 40, 45, 47, 48,
- 49, 53, 54, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 74, 76, 77,
- 78, 82, 84, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 94, 101, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107,
- 109, 114, 116, 117, 118, 119, 122, 123, 124, 125, 127, 128, 129,
- 130, 131, 132, 133, 138
- PacketCluster, 6, 37, 38, 77, 101, 105, 108, 133, 134
- PacketClusterZap, 22
- PACLEN, 133
- Patience, 125
- PBBS, 80
- PBMON, 133
- PC-HAM, 13, 54, 58, 109, 134, 136
- Pcz, 113, 124, 125
- PgDn, 4, 42, 46, 55, 56, 60
- PgUp, 4, 8, 42, 55, 56, 106
- Phone, 25
- Pick, 3, 4, 42, 46, 48, 49, 53, 57, 59, 123, 124, 128, 133
- PK, 1, 11, 12, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 23, 28, 61, 62, 63, 74, 75, 76,
- 77, 79, 80, 82, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99,
- 100, 103, 106, 107, 109, 110, 117, 118, 119, 127, 129, 130, 131,
- 132, 133, 137
- Plan, 17, 81, 82, 134
- PO, 1
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 150
-
-
- Pointing, 137
- Policy, 11
- Possible, 112
- Post, 11
- Postage, 25, 138
- Pounds, 1
- Preferred, 25
- Presents, 46, 50
- Prompt, 6, 28, 32, 33, 37, 61, 64, 75, 77, 83, 86, 133
- PromptWindow, 6, 83
- PST, 17
- Public, 124, 125
- Putting, 113
-
- QBM, 4, 6, 10, 50, 51, 77, 108, 121, 122, 126
- QBU, 4, 6, 10, 50, 51, 78, 109, 112, 125, 128, 133
- QBU-RX, 6, 9, 51, 78, 107, 109, 112, 125
- QBU-TX, 6, 9, 51, 78, 107, 109, 112, 125
- QDB, 4, 10, 50, 52, 122, 126
- QJG, 10, 52, 128
- QJL, 11
- QMH, 10, 14, 122, 126, 130
- QNO, 10, 51, 52, 72, 73, 120, 126, 127, 128
- QRA, 4, 10, 15, 53, 127
- QRM, 12, 20, 27, 64, 69, 127
- QRT, 6, 10, 23, 64, 69, 79, 80, 100, 116, 127, 128
- QRU, 4, 10, 50, 52, 53, 110, 111, 127, 128
- QRV, 6, 10, 51, 52, 79, 80, 120, 128
- QRZ, 2, 8, 31, 32, 66, 68, 101, 105
- QSL, 10, 45, 51, 52, 54, 55, 64, 66, 68, 120, 128, 134, 136
- QSM, 4, 10, 50, 51, 113, 114, 126, 133
- QSO, 13, 22, 24, 25, 28, 38, 47, 50, 67, 69, 73, 74, 89, 91, 95,
- 96, 98, 105, 114, 117
- QSP, 4, 5, 10, 23, 50, 51, 52, 53, 68, 72, 108, 111, 120, 127, 128
- QSY, 64, 69
- QTA, 4, 9, 10, 50, 53, 107, 112, 113, 121, 128, 133
- QTC, 5, 10, 14, 22, 68, 70, 71, 72, 76, 108, 114, 128
- QTC-Snatch, 114, 115, 130
- Queries, 11
- Questionable, 11
- Questions, 1
- Quickly, 123
- Quite, 123
- QYD, 10, 129
- QYU, 10, 129
- QZ, 9, 17, 53, 81, 82, 108, 113, 124, 128
- QZD, 4, 10, 50, 53, 113, 124, 125, 128, 133
- QZD-RX, 113, 125
- QZD-TX, 113, 125
- QZU, 4, 10, 50, 53, 113, 124, 125, 128, 133
- QZU-RX, 113, 124
- QZU-TX, 113, 124
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 151
-
-
-
- Radio, 1, 2, 11, 12, 13, 14, 62, 63, 65, 87, 88, 100, 107, 113, 119,
- 120, 123, 124, 125, 130, 131, 134, 136
- Radios, 137
- Reads, 137
- ReadyCrest, 1
- Recognize, 12, 18, 20, 27, 71, 115
- Recommended, 62
- Reconnect, 53
- Recovery, 124
- Refunded, 1
- Registering, 1
- Regret, 11
- Regrets, 11
- REJECT, 69, 79
- Release, 24
- Released, 24
- Remade, 128
- ReMember, 3, 13, 32, 33, 37, 73, 90, 94, 110
- Reminder, 50
- Repeat, 10, 17, 27, 51, 106, 114, 126
- Replacing, 17
- Restart, 20, 68
- Retried, 128
- RETRIES, 93
- Review, 17
- RH, 76
- RM, 40, 76
- RN, 40, 76
- Road, 139
- Robot, 2, 3, 8, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, 27, 46, 47, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69,
- 95, 96, 101, 104, 114, 136
- Route, 61, 65
- RTTY, 5, 7, 16, 22, 27, 62, 63, 88, 96, 98, 105, 106, 107, 133, 134
- RXR, 63
- RY's, 101, 133
- RYs, 8, 105
- Rz, 113
-
- SAREX, 5, 7, 15, 23, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 86, 108, 133
- Satisfied, 1
- Scheduler, 14, 47
- Screen, 3, 10, 15, 16, 21, 28, 30, 39, 43, 44, 45, 46, 54, 58, 60,
- 69, 71, 82, 83, 90, 93, 97, 98, 99, 101, 106, 107, 109, 119, 120,
- 125, 138
- Screwed, 54
- Scroll, 25, 42, 43, 83, 106
- Scrollback, 8, 106, 133
- ScrollBackWindow, 6, 83
- Sealink, 124
- SELCAL, 6, 8, 15, 16, 22, 24, 28, 33, 34, 37, 38, 76, 77, 97, 98,
- 99, 101, 105, 108
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 152
-
-
- Semiautomatic, 13, 54, 74
- Service, 62
- Shift, 2, 8, 9, 22, 29, 63, 89, 92, 96, 97, 98, 99, 107, 112
- Shut-down, 133
- Shutting, 62
- Sideband, 106, 107
- SIGNAL, 7, 8, 14, 15, 18, 22, 27, 48, 52, 71, 88, 89, 95, 100, 103,
- 105, 106, 107, 118, 130, 131, 132
- Signifies, 24
- Smiling, 24
- Smith, 124
- Solid, 105
- SOLO, 6, 7, 23, 80, 90, 91
- Speedy, 123
- ST, 134
- Stack, 133
- STANDBY, 7, 8, 88, 89, 95, 96
- Stated, 123
- Status, 2, 5, 16, 21, 27, 33, 39, 60, 61, 62, 64, 65, 66, 69, 70,
- 72, 73, 79, 83, 86, 87, 90, 91, 93, 94, 97, 98, 99, 106, 107, 117,
- 130, 133, 138, 139
- StatusWindow, 6, 83
- Sterling, 1
- Stream, 7, 8, 66, 84, 85, 91, 92, 94, 101, 104, 118
- Streams, 19, 24, 92, 94, 104, 118
- Strongly, 62
- Sub-directory, 126
- Sub-menu, 75, 76, 77, 78, 81, 86
- Sub-modes, 23
- Subject, 39, 44
- Sufficient, 25
- Suffix, 29, 30, 46, 59, 73, 112
- Switched, 62
- SYS, 3, 7, 9, 16, 17, 19, 27, 38, 40, 42, 45, 51, 57, 61, 68, 72,
- 77, 79, 86, 93, 94, 98, 99, 107, 108, 109, 110, 118, 119, 121,
- 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 135
-
- TCP, 134
- Telephones, 1
- Terrestrial, 63
- Terry, 1
- Testing, 123
- TheLink, 35, 109
- Time-out, 117
- Timer, 27, 66, 67, 94, 116
- Timestamp, 109
- Timing, 125
- TNC, 1, 2, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 26, 27,
- 28, 29, 30, 31, 33, 36, 37, 38, 43, 44, 48, 50, 51, 60, 61, 62,
- 65, 66, 67, 68, 70, 71, 74, 77, 79, 80, 81, 82, 88, 91, 92, 93,
- 94, 98, 99, 100, 101, 103, 108, 109, 113, 114, 117, 118, 119, 122,
- 125, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, 135, 138
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 153
-
-
- Today, 123
- Traffic, 7, 24, 53, 63, 64, 70, 76, 90, 91, 92, 118
- Transferring, 62
- Trigger, 5, 15, 39, 64, 72, 76, 108, 115
- Trouble, 17
- Tuning, 105
- TXR, 63
- TXT, 6, 19, 26, 44, 48, 69, 78, 95, 117
- Type-ahead, 28
-
- Un-mark, 56
- Unique, 124
- UNPROTO, 67, 91
- Unshift, 63, 98
- Unshift-on-space, 22
- Updating, 17
- Upgrade, 24, 25
- Uplinking, 53
- Upload, 6, 10, 40, 41, 50, 52, 53, 78, 121, 122, 124, 126, 127, 128,
- 129
- Uppercase, 4, 48, 49, 77
- Urban, 123
- USOS, 8, 22, 63, 96, 98, 107
-
- Varying, 123
- VAT, 1
- Verbose, 76
- Verification, 123
- Visa, 1
-
- Watch, 119
- Window, 2, 16, 21, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 32, 33, 39, 42, 43, 44, 45,
- 46, 50, 59, 61, 62, 64, 65, 69, 70, 72, 73, 79, 82, 83, 84, 85,
- 86, 87, 90, 91, 94, 97, 98, 99, 104, 106, 107, 130, 131, 133
- Windows, 29, 42, 44, 45, 83, 84, 85
- Winter, 81
- Wpm, 88, 107, 133
-
- XFLOW, 21, 119
- XMITOK, 89, 133
- Xmodem, 123, 124
-
- YAPP, 2, 10, 18, 110, 122, 123, 129, 134
- Yellow, 21, 22, 24
- Ymodem, 124
- Yourcall, 37, 40, 50, 70, 72, 105, 115, 126
- YYMMDD, 9, 25, 46, 49, 109, 133, 138
-
- Zap, 3, 7, 8, 33, 37, 39, 41, 44, 45, 46, 47, 62, 64, 65, 68, 74,
- 75, 76, 86, 87, 101, 102, 105
- ZapBBS, 22, 74, 75
- ZCZC, 98, 99
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
- LAN-LINK Index Page 154
-
-
- Zmodem, 10, 15, 17, 50, 53, 113, 124, 125, 128, 133
- ZModem's, 53
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LAN-LINK.DOC (c) G3ZCZ 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991
-
-